P341

Technical Guide TG8617A
MiCOM P341
Interconnection Protection Relay
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Volume 1
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
INTERCONNECTION PROTECTION RELAY
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

SAFETY SECTION
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2
APPLICATION NOTES
Includes Publication R6617,
P341 Interconnection Protection Relay
CHAPTER 3
RELAY DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 4
TECHNICAL DATA
CHAPTER 5
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
APPENDIX A
COURIER DATA BASE
APPENDIX B
EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
TG8617A
Volume 1
Contents
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause
serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have
been reduced.
The electronic circuits of ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd products are immune to the relevant levels
of electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by
withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it
becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high
reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment
by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and
IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is
preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not
available, you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static.
Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in
BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on
the equipment.
Health and safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them
in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the
product documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal.

Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective/
safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*Note:The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct
equivalent of the North American term ground.
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or
servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp
terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal
and tool for the wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth
terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug
connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a
safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in
the technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity;
CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric
shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the
equipment.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised,
since this may result in damage.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.
Decommissioning and Disposal

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include
capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric
shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the
supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external
terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal:
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water

courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a
safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have
them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid
short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this
equipment is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the product documentation.
Insulation class: IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995
Class I
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995
Class I
This equipment requires a

protective (safety) earth
connection to ensure user
safety.
Installation
Category
(Overvoltage):
IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995

Category III
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995
Category III
Distribution level, fixed

installation. Equipment in
this category is qualification
tested at 5kV peak,
1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J,
between all supply circuits
and earth and also between
independent circuits.
Environment:
IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995

Pollution degree 2
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995
Pollution degree 2
Compliance is demonstrated
by reference to generic
safety standards.
Product safety:
73/23/EEC
Compliance with the

European Commission Low
Voltage Directive.
EN 61010-1:
EN 60950:
1993/A2: 1995
1992/A11: 1997
Compliance is demonstrated
by reference to generic
safety standards.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Chapter 1
Introduction
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Contents
Page 1 of 1
1.
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES
3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.7
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Introduction to the relay
Front panel
Relay rear panel
Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options
Menu structure
Protection settings
Disturbance recorder settings
Control and support settings
Password protection
Relay confirguration
Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
Default display and menu time-out
Menu navigation and setting browsing
Password entry
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
Settings changes
Front communication port user interface
Rear communication port user interface
Courier communication
Modbus communication
IEC60807-5 CS 103 communication
4
4
4
5
6
8
9
9
9
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
13
14
16
16
18
20
Relay front view

Relay rear view
Menu structure
Front panel user interface
Front port connection
PC relay signal connection
Remote communication connection arrangements
4
6
8
11
14
15
17
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 1.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 1 of 21
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply

requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from
ALSTOM.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through
extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply
control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
P range protection relays;
C range control products;
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical
publication which can be obtained from:
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd, or your local sales office. Alternatively visit
our web site.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 2.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 2 of 21
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES
The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM

protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and
application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay
and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection
engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the
protection of the power system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is
intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning
and maintenance of the relay.
The chapter content within each volume is summarised below:
Volume 1 Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1
Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing
how to start using the relay.
Chapter 2
Application Notes (includes a copy of publication R6617)

Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay
including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as
event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme
logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system
applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked
examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
Chapter 3
Relay Description
Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This chapter
includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
Chapter 4
Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended
operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with
technical standards is quoted where appropriate.
Chapter 5
Communications and Interface Guide

This chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access
the settings database stored within the relay. The chapter also gives
information on each of the communication protocols that can be used with
the relay, and is intended to allow the user to design a custom interface to
a SCADA system.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 3 of 21
Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103

Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
Volume 2 Operation Guide

Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1
Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing
how to start using the relay.
Chapter 2
Installation (includes a copy of publication R6617)

Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the
relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is
provided incorporating earthing recommendations.
Chapter 3
Commissioning and Maintenance

Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the
calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for
the relay is outlined.
Chapter 4
Problem Analysis.
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of
action.
Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103

Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 3.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 4 of 21
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both
from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication
ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how
to get started using the relay.
3.1
Introduction to the relay
3.1.1
Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top
and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel
can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place
read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not
compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows
access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for
editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the
top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this
will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the
bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab.
The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from
their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*, V Ratings
Top cover
Zn
Vx
Vn
SER No
DIAG No
1/5 A 50/60 Hz
V
V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed
function
LEDs
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
User programable
function LEDs
= CLEAR
= READ
= ENTER
Keypad
SK1
SK2
Bottom
cover
Battery compartment
Figure 1:
Front comms port
Download/monitor port
Relay front view
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 5 of 21
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (
,
, , and
an enter key (), a clear key (C), and a read key ( ).
),
12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay
(up to 15m distance) via an RS232 serial data connection.
a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed
local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to
indicate the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may
be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the
alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant
illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be
on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that
there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED
is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2
Relay rear panel

The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the
relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Optional IRIG-B board
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 6 of 21
Digital input connections
Power supply
connection
PORT 1
IRIG B
TX
Rear comms port

(RS485)
RX
Current* and voltage

input terminals
Digital output
(relays) connections
Figure 2: Relay rear view
Refer to the wiring diagram in Appendix B for complete connection details.

3.2
Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

The relay has three user interfaces:
the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
the front port which supports Courier communication.
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus or
IEC 60870-5-103. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the
relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the
three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 7 of 21
Keypad/LCD
Courier
Modbus
Display & modification of

all settings
Digital I/O signal status

Display/extraction of
measurements
fault records
event & alarm records
Extraction of disturbance
records
Programmable scheme
logic settings
Reset of fault & alarm

records
Clear event & fault

records
Time synchronisation
Control commands
Table 1
IEC60870
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.3
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 8 of 21
Menu structure
The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column
contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column.
Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column
heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of
the manual.
Column header
Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data
View records
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Column
data
settings
Control & support
Group 1
Group 2
Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4
Figure 3: Menu structure
All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the
setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay
immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary
scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been
confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to
provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a
group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.3.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 9 of 21
Protection settings
The protection settings include the following items:
protection element settings
scheme logic settings
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and
is used by the protection elements.
3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings

The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that
trigger the recording.
3.3.3

The control and support settings include:
relay configuration settings
open/close circuit breaker*
CT & VT ratio settings*
reset LEDs
active protection setting group
password & language settings
circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
communications settings
measurement settings
event & fault record settings
user interface settings
commissioning settings
3.4
Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is
enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are
summarised in Table 2.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 10 of 21
Access level
Operations enabled
Level 0
No password required
Read access to all settings, alarms, event

records and fault records.
Level 1
Password 1 or 2 required
As level 0 plus:
Control commands, e.g.
circuit breaker open/close.
Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Level 2
Password 2 required
As level 1 plus:
All other settings.
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System
data column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each
interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication
port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is
entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will
time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to
the default level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied
- contact ALSTOM with the relays serial number. The current level of access
enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in
the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI),
can also be found as one of the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the
Password control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu
(note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5
Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable
many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is
disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a
function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to
Disabled.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings
to be copied to another group.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 11 of 21
To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be
copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be
placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and
will only be used by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the
relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they
have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master
station.
3.6
Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)

When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the
relay, with the information displayed on the LCD.
The , , and keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.
System
frequency
Other default displays
3-phase voltage
Alarm messages
Date and time
C
C
Column n
Group 4
Overcurrent
Column 1
Sytem data
Column 2
View records
Data 1.1
Language
Data 2.1
Last record
Data 1.2
Password
Data 2.2
Time and date
Other setting
cells in
column 1
Other setting
cells in
column 2
Other setting
cells in
column n
Data 1.n
Password
level 2
Data 2.n
C A voltage
Data n.n
|> char angle
Other column headings
Data n.1
|>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
from any menu cell
Figure 4: Front panel user interface
Data n.2
|>1 directional
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.6.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 12 of 21
Default display and menu time-out

The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and
return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of
keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been
confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and
time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is
selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from
the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through
using the and keys. However the menu selected default display will be
restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared
alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.)
the default display will be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults
present
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.
3.6.2
Menu navigation and setting browsing

The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown
in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the key will display the first
column heading. To select the required column heading use the the and keys.
The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
and keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up
arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key C. It is only possible
to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default
display press the [up arrow symbol] key or the clear key C from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of
the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the key, as the auto-repeat will
stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the key must be
released and pressed again.
3.6.3
Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter Password
**** Level 1
Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be
changed. Press the and keys to vary each character between A and Z.
To move between the character fields of the password, use the and keys.
The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key . The display will revert to
Enter Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will
be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 13 of 21
what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected
setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue.
If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt
page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key C.
Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell of the System
data column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key C
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records

The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default
display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be
self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the
alarm messages press the read key . When all alarms have been viewed, but
not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and
the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages
of this use the
key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press C; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press . Depending on the password
configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm
messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have
been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was
illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the
key, the C key can be pressed, this will move the
display straight to the fault record. Pressing C again will move straight to the alarm
reset prompt where pressing C once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5
Setting changes
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.
To change the cell value press the enter key , which will bring up a flashing
cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen
if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a
password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or
keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required
bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the and keys.
When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting
value by pressing . Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the
clear button C is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 14 of 21
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must
be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required
changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key.
Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:
Upate settings?
Enter or Clear
Pressing will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing C will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after
they are entered, without Update settings? prompt.
3.7
Front communication port user interface

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector
located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m
distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication
protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D
Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays.
The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program
MiCOM S1 which is a Windows NT based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2
SK1
Battery
25 pin
download/monitor port
9 pin
front comms port
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
Serial communication port

(COM 1 or COM 2)
Figure 5: Front port connection
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2
Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3
Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5
0V Zero volts common
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 15 of 21
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected
to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as
below (if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way
9 Way
Pin no. 3
Rx Receive data
Pin no. 2
Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7
0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to
the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin
on the PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin
connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e.
one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a
common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx
and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one
that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin
configuration as the relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
Serial data connector
DCE
Pin 2 Tx
Pin 3 Rx
Pin 5 0V
DTE
Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
Figure 6: PC relay signal connection
Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:
Protocol
Courier
Baud rate
19,200 bits/s
Courier address
Message format
11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit

(even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages
are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that
has been enabled will be revoked.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.8
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 16 of 21
Rear communication port user interface

The rear port can support one of three communication protocols (Courier, Modbus,
IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered.
The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located
on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals.
The rear port provides K-Bus/RS485 serial data communication and is intended for
use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three
connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus and
IEC 60870-5-103 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the
Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to
the Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the
communication protocol being used by the rear port.
3.8.1
Courier communication
Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection &
Control to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays.
Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in
the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is
requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit
such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T, ACCESS or a SCADA system.
MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is
specifically designed for setting changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier,
a KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd. A typical connection arrangement is shown
in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible connection
arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the
manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring
can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 17 of 21
Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232
K-Bus
PC
PC serial port
KITZ protocol
converter
Modem
Public switched
telephone network
Courier master station

eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station

eg. area control centre
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements
Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration
column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two
settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity
timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell
down which indicates the communication protocol:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 18 of 21
Protocol
Courier
The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address
1
Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure
7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from
the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address
is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking
any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between
1 and 30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an
on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes
cell of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not
require this action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2
Modbus communication
Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by
supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action.
Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port
and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration
column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the
Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
Modbus
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 19 of 21
The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:
Modbus address
23
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is
necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer
number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master
station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking
any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between
1 and 30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the
relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus
master station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
Modbus master station.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.8.3
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 20 of 21
IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication

The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems,
Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use
a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC
60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for
direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses
standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD
user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the
Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications
column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are
described below. Move down the Communications column from the column
heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:
Remote address
162
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it
is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an
integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no
two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103
address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600bits/s
IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported
by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud
rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master
station.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 1
Page 21 of 21
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements:
Measuret period
30.00 s
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be
set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Physical link
RS485
The default setting is to select the electrical RS485 connection. If the optional fibre
optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre
optic.
The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this
interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*.
Function type
226
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Chapter 2
Application Notes
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
1.
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
INTRODUCTION
Interconnection protection
MiCOM Interconnection Protection Relay
Protection features
Non-protection features
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.5.1
2.6
2.6.1
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.1.1
2.7.2
2.7.2.1
2.7.3
2.7.3.1
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.11
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.5
2.11.6
2.12
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.14
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.15
2.15.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Configuration column
CT and VT ratios
Loss of mains protection
Rate of change of frequency protection
Setting guidelines for df/dt protection
Voltage vector shift protection
Setting guidelines for Voltage Vector Shift protection
Reconnection timer
Setting guidelines for the Reconnect Delay
Power protection
Over Power protection
Over Power setting guideline
Low Forward Power protection function
Low Forward Power setting guideline
Reverse Power protection function
Reverse Power setting guideline
Overcurrent protection
Transformer Magnetising Inrush
Application of Timer Hold facility
Setting guidelines
Directional overcurrent protection
Synchronous polarisation
Setting guidelines
Earth fault protection
Standard Earth Fault protection element
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection element (SEF)
Directional Earth Fault protection (DEF)
Residual voltage polarisation
Negative sequence polarisation
General setting guidelines for DEF
Application to insulated systems
Setting guidelines insulated systems
Application to Petersen Coil earthed systems
Operation of sensitive earth fault element
Application considerations
Calculation of required relay settings
Application of settings to the relay
Restricted earth fault protection
High impedance restricted earth fault protection
Setting guidelines for high impedance REF
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage
displacement protection
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 1 of 4
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
8
9
10
12
13
14
14
16
16
16
17
17
19
19
22
23
23
24
25
26
26
26
29
32
32
32
32
33
36
36
42
43
43
44
44
45
46
49
52
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 2 of 4
2.16
2.16.1
2.17
2.17.1
2.18
2.18.1
2.19
2.19.1
2.20
2.20.1
2.20.2
2.21
2.21.1
2.21.2
Under voltage protection

Setting guidelines for under voltage protection
Over voltage protection
Setting guidelines for over voltage protection
Under frequency protection
Setting guidelines for under frequency protection
Over frequency protection function
Setting guidelines for over frequency protection
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)
Breaker failure protection configurations
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
Typical settings
Breaker fail timer settings
Breaker fail undercurrent settings
53
55
55
57
58
59
61
62
62
62
63
66
66
66
3.
3.1
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS

Blocked overcurrent protection
67
67
4.
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.1.1
4.5.1.2
4.5.1.3
4.5.1.4
4.5.1.5
4.5.1.6
4.5.1.7
4.5.1.8
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.6
4.7
4.7 1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.5.1
4.7.5.2
4.7.5.3
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Voltage transformer supervision (VTS)
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
Menu settings
Current transformer supervision
The CT supervision feature
Setting the CT supervision element
Circuit breaker state monitoring
Circuit breaker state monitoring features
Circuit breaker control
Event & fault records
Types of event
Change of state of opto-isolated inputs.
Change of state of one or more output relay contacts.
Relay alarm conditions.
Protection element starts and trips
General events
Fault records.
Maintenance reports
Setting changes
Resetting of event/fault records
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software
Disturbance recorder
Measurements
Measured voltages and currents
Sequence voltages and currents
Power and energy quantities
Rms. voltages and currents
Demand values
Fixed demand values
Rolling demand values
Peak demand values
69
69
69
69
70
71
71
72
72
72
73
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
79
79
79
80
80
80
82
82
82
82
83
83
83
84
84
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 3 of 4
4.7.6
4.7.6.1
4.7.6.2
4.7.6.3
4.7.6.4
4.7.6.5
4.7.6.6
4.7.6.7
Settings
Default display
Local values
Remote values
Measurement ref
Measurement mode
Fixed demand period
Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
84
84
84
84
84
84
85
85
5.
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
CT/VT REQUIREMENTS
Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements
Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements
Non-Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements
Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth
fault (SEF) protection
Time delayed SEF protection
Non-directional SEF protection
Directional instantaneous SEF protection
SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
86
86
86
86
86
87
Typical system with embedded generation

Vector diagram representing steady state condition
Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters
Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current DIL
Typical distribution system using parallel transformers
Positioning of core balance current transformers
Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault
Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault
Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system
Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault
Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc
Zero sequence network showing residual currents
Practical case:- resistance present in XL and Xc
Resistive components of spill current
High impedance principle
High impedance REF relay/CT connections
7
11
11
11
25
31
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
45
46
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.6
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1:
2a:
2b:
2c:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Figure 15a:
Figure 15b:
Figure 16:
Figure 17a:
Figure 17b:
Figure 18:
Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems

Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems
Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with
system load shedding.
Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
Remote control of circuit breaker
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Contents
Page 4 of 4
50
51
60
67
68
74
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 1.
1.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 1 of 87
INTRODUCTION
Interconnection protection
Small-scale generators can be found in a wide range of situations. These may be
used to provide emergency power in the event of loss of the main supply.
Alternatively the generation of electrical power may be a by-product of a heat/
steam generation process. Where such embedded generation capacity exists it can
be economic to run the machines in parallel with the local Public Electricity
Suppliers (PES) network. This can reduce a sites overall power demand or peak
load. Additionally, excess generation may be exported and sold to the local PES.
If parallel operation is possible great care must be taken to ensure that the
embedded generation does not cause any dangerous conditions to exist on the
local PES network.
PES networks have in general been designed for operation where the generation is
supplied from central sources down into the network. Generated voltages and
frequency are closely monitored to ensure that values at the point of supply are
within statutory limits. Tap changers and tap changer control schemes are
optimised to ensure that supply voltages remain within these limits. Embedded
generation can affect the normal flow of active and reactive power on the network
leading to unusually high or low voltages being produced and may also lead to
excessive fault current that could exceed the rating of the installed distribution
switchgear/cables.
It may also be possible for the embedded generators to become disconnected from
the main source of supply but be able to supply local load on the PES network.
Such islanded operation must be avoided for several reasons
to ensure that unearthed operation of the PES network is avoided
to ensure that automatic reclosure of system circuit breakers will not result in
connecting unsynchronised supplies causing damage to the generators
to ensure that system operations staff cannot attempt unsynchronised manual
closure of an open circuit breaker.
to ensure that there is no chance of faults on the PES system being undetectable
due to the low fault supplying capability of the embedded generator
to ensure that the voltage and frequency supplied to PES customers remains
within statutory limits
Before granting permission for the generation to be connected to their system the
PES must be satisfied that no danger will result. The type and extent of protection
required at the interconnection point between PES system and embedded
generation will need to be analysed.
1.2
MiCOM Interconnection Protection Relay

MiCOM relays are a new range of products from ALSTOM T&D Protection &
Control Ltd. Using the latest numerical technology the platform includes devices
designed for the application to a wide range of power system plant such as
motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables.
Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in
order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such
product in the range is the P341 Interconnection Protection Relay. The relay has
been designed to provide a wide range of protection functions required to prevent
dangerous conditions that could be present when embedded generators provide
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 2 of 87
power to local power supply networks when the main connection with the
Electricity Supply system is lost.
The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid
with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed
remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.
1.2.1
Protection features
The P341 relay contains a wide variety of protection functions, these are
summarised below:
Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection Four stage back-up protection.
Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Four stage back-up protection.
Neutral Displacement Protection Provides protection against earth faults on
impedance earthed/un-earthed systems.
Under/Over Voltage Protection Two stage protection to prevent the supply of
unusual voltages to external supply network.
Under/Over Frequency Protection Six stage frequency protection to prevent
the supply of unusual frequencies to the external supply network.
Reverse Power Protection against prime mover failure of a generator.
Low Forward Power Provides an interlock for non urgent tripping.
Over Power Back-up overload protection, or protection against excessive
export power to local network
Rate of Change of Frequency Protection To detect the loss of connection to
main Grid supply network.
Voltage Vector Shift Protection To detect the loss of connection to main Grid
supply network.
Voltage Transformer Supervision To prevent mal-operation of voltage
dependent protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal.
Programmable Scheme Logic Allowing user defined protection and control
logic to suit particular customer applications.
1.2.2
Non-protection features
Below is a summary of the P341 relay non-protective features.
Measurements Various measurements of value for display on the relay or
accessed from the serial communications, eg. currents, voltages etc.
Fault/Event/Disturbance Records Available from the serial communications or
on the relay display (fault/event records only on relay display).
Four Setting Groups Independent setting groups to cater for alternative power
system and protection arrangements or special applications.
Remote Serial Communications To allow remote access to the relays.
The following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS and
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW).
Continuous Self Monitoring Power-on diagnostics and self checking routines to
provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
Commissioning test facilities.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 3 of 87
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION

FUNCTIONS
The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to

where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the
respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to
the relay.
2.1
Configuration column
The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the CONFIGURATION
column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions.
The aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single
point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this
column do not then appear within the main relay menu.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Configuration column, with
default settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also
provided.
Menu text
Default setting
Available settings
Function
No Operation
No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Restore default
settings to any or
all groups of settings
Setting Group
Select via Menu
Select via Menu

Select via Optos
Change setting
groups by?
Active Settings
Group 1
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Select active setting

group used for
protection settings
Save Changes
No Operation
No Operation
Save
Abort
Saves all setting

changes from
stored settings
buffer memory into
stored settings
Group 1
Group1,2,3 or 4
Selects a group
of settings to copy
to the group
designated in
Copy to cell
CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults
Copy From
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 4 of 87
Menu text
Default setting
Available settings
Function
Copy To
No Operation
Group1,2,3 or 4
Copies the group of

settings selected in
the Copy from cell
to the selected
setting group
Setting Group 1
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 1
settings are available
on the relay
Setting Group 2
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 2
on the relay
Setting Group 3
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 3
on the relay
Setting Group 4
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 4
on the relay
Power
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Makes settings visible

in the relay menu
Overcurrent
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Earth Fault
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
SEF/REF Protn
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Residual O/V NVD
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
df/dt
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
V Vector Shift
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Reconnect Delay
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Volt Protection
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 5 of 87
Default setting
Available settings
Function
Freq Protection
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
CB Fail
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Supervision
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Input Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible

in the relay menu
Output Labels
Visible

in the relay menu
CT & VT Ratios
Visible

in the relay menu
Event Recorder
Invisible

in the relay menu
Disturb Recorder
Invisible

in the relay menu
Measuret Setup
Invisible

in the relay menu
Comms Settings
Visible

in the relay menu
Commission Tests
Visible

in the relay menu
Setting Values
Primary
Primary or
Secondary
Selects if relay
protection settings
are displayed in
primary or secondary
current/voltage values
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 6 of 87
CT and VT ratios
The P340 relay allows the current and voltage settings to be applied to the relay in
either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by programming the Setting
Values cell of the CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary.
When this cell is set to Primary, all current, voltage and impedance setting values
are scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios. These are found in the VT & CT
RATIOS column, settings for which are shown below.
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
100V
1000000V
CT & VT RATIOS
Main VT Primary
Main VT Secy
NVD VT Primary
NVD VT Secondary
2.3
110V
1V
110 V
80V
140V
110V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
400V
360V
480V
400V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
110 V
100 V
1000000 V
1V
110 V
80V
140V
110V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
400V
360V
480V
400V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Phase CT Primary
30000
Phase CT Secy
E/F CT Primary
30000
E/F CT Secondary
SEF CT Primary
30000
SEF CT Secondary
Loss of mains protection

If the capacity of an embedded generator exceeds the locally connected load it is
conceivable that it could supply the local load in island mode. Fault clearance may
disconnect part of the public supply system from the main source of supply resulting
in the embedded generation feeding the local loads, ie. a Loss of Mains or Loss
of Grid condition. This is illustrated in Figure 1. A fault at F will result in the
tripping of CB1 disconnecting substations S1, S2 and S3 from the main source of
supply. Also note that transformer T1 was supplying the earth connection for S1,
S2 and S3, this earth connection is lost when CB1 opens. Should the load at
substations S1 and S2 greatly exceed the rating of EG1, the generator will slow
down quickly and underfrequency and/or undervoltage relays could operate to
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 7 of 87
disconnect EG1 from the system. The worst scenario is when the external load is
smaller than the generator rating, in this case the generator can continue to
operate normally supplying the external loads. The local system will now be
operating unearthed and overcurrent protection may be inoperative at S1 and S2
due to the low fault supplying capacity of generator EG1. The embedded
generator may also lose synchronism with the main system supply leading to
serious problems if CB1 has auto reclosing equipment.
An even more serious problem presents itself if manual operation of distribution
switchgear is considered. System Operation staff may operate circuit breakers by
hand. In these circumstances it is essential that unsynchronised reclosure is
prevented as this could have very serious consequences for the operator,
particularly if the switchgear is not designed, or rated, to be operated when
switching onto a fault. To protect personnel, the embedded machine must be
disconnected from the system as soon as the system connection is broken, this will
ensure that manual unsynchronised closure is prevented.
CB2
T1
CB1
EG1
PES
system
S3
S1
S2
Figure 1:
Typical system with embedded generation
Where the embedded generator does not export power under normal conditions it
may be possible to use directional power or directional overcurrent protection
relays to detect the export of power under loss of mains conditions. If export of
power into the system is allowed it may not be possible to set directional relays
using settings sensitive enough to detect the loss of the mains connection. In such
circumstances a Rate of Change of Frequency and/or Voltage Vector Shift
protection can be applied. These detect the slight variation in generator speed that
occurs when the main supply connection is disconnected and the generator
experiences a step change in load.
The type of protection required to detect Loss of Mains conditions will depend on a
number of factors, eg. the generator rating, size of local load, ability to export
power, and configuration of supply network etc. Protection requirements should be
discussed and agreed with the local Public Electricity Supplier before permission to
connect the embedded generator in parallel with the system is granted.
A number of protection elements that may be sensitive to the Loss of Mains
conditions are offered in the P341 relay; Rate of Change of Frequency, Voltage
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 8 of 87
Vector Shift, Over Power Protection, Directional Overcurrent Protection, Frequency

Protection, Voltage Protection. Application of each of these elements is discussed in
the following sections.
2.4
Rate of change of frequency protection

When a machine is running in parallel with the main power supply the frequency
and hence speed of the machine will be governed by the grid supply. When the
connection with the grid is lost, as described in Section 2.3, the now islanded
machine is free to slow down or speed up as determined by the new load
conditions, machine rating and governor response. Where there is a significant
change in load conditions between the synchronised and islanded condition the
machine will speed up or slow down before the governor can respond.
The rate of change of speed, or frequency, following a power disturbance can be
approximated by
P.f
dt = 2GH
df
where
Change in power output between synchronised and islanded

operation
Rated frequency
G =
Machine rating in MVA
Inertia constant
This simple expression assumes that the machine is running at rated frequency and
that the time intervals are short enough that AVR and governor dynamics can be
ignored. From this equation it is clear that the rate of change of frequency is
directly proportional to the change in power output between two conditions.
Provided there is a small change in load between the synchronised and islanded
(loss of mains) condition the rate of change of frequency as the machine adjusts to
the new load conditions can be detectable. The change in speed of the machine is
also proportional to the inertia constant and rating of the machine and so will be
application dependent.
Care must be taken in applying this type of protection as the prime consideration is
detecting the loss of grid connection. Failure to detect this condition may result in
unsynchronised re-connection via remote re-closing equipment. However if too
sensitive a setting is chosen there is a risk of nuisance tripping due to frequency
fluctuations caused by normal heavy load switching or fault clearance. Guidance
can be given for setting a rate of change of frequency element but these settings
must be thoroughly tested on site to prove their accuracy for a given machine and
load.
A single stage, definite time delayed, rate of change of frequency element is
provide in the P341 relay. The element calculates the rate of change of frequency
every 3 cycles by calculating the frequency difference over the 3-cycle period as
shown.
df
dt
f n f n3cycle
3cycle
Two consecutive calculations must give a result above the setting threshold before a
trip decision can be initiated.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 9 of 87
The element also allows the user to set a frequency band within which the element
is blocked. This provides additional stability for non loss of grid disturbances which
do not affect the machine frequency significantly.
A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate that the element has
operated (DDB 202). A second DDB signal is available to indicate that the element
has started (DDB 318). These signals are used to operate the output relays (as
programmed into the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL)) and trigger the
disturbance recorder. The state of the DDB signals can also be programmed to be
viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the rate of change of frequency or
df/dt protection element, including the available setting ranges and factory
defaults:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
df/dt
df/dt Status
Enabled
df/dt Setting
0.2 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
10 Hz/s
0.01 Hz/s
0.5 s
0s
100 s
0.1 s
df/dt f low
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
df/dt f high
50.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
df/dt Time Delay
2.4.1
Enabled, Disabled
Setting guidelines for df/dt protection

The rate of change of frequency, or df/dt, protection can be selected by setting the
df/dt Status cell to Enabled.
The rate of change of frequency setting threshold, df/dt Setting, should be set to
the desired level.
The time delay setting, df/dt Time Delay, can be used to provide a degree of
stability against normal load switching events which will cause a change in the
frequency before governor correction.
The frequency dead band can be set by setting the upper and lower frequency
thresholds, df/dt f High, df/dt f Low, respectively.
The setting thresholds should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be
detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning.
System simulation testing has shown that the following settings can provide stable
operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst operating for a loss
of mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine output, for a typical
4MW machine. These can be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable
in all applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system
load, will all affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
df/dt Setting
0.2Hz/s
df/dt Time Delay
0.5s
df/dt f High
50.5Hz
df/dt f Low
49.5Hz
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 10 of 87
Once installed, the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are
adequate to detect a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that
unwanted tripping occurs during normal fault clearance, or load switching, that
does not lead to the loss of mains condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and
this should be kept in mind when optimising settings; non-synchronised manual
operation of circuit breakers must be prevented by disconnection of the embedded
machine when the system becomes separated.
2.5
Voltage vector shift protection

An expression for a sinusoidal mains voltage waveform is generally given by the
following:
V = Vp sin (wt)
where
or
V = Vp sin (t)
(t) = wt = 2ft
If the frequency is changing at constant rate Rf from a frequency fo then the

variation in the angle (t) is given by:
(t) = 2 f dt,
which gives
and
(t) = 2 (fo t + t Rf t/2),

V = V sin {2 (fo + t Rf/2)t}
Hence the angle change (t) after time t is given by:

(t) = Rf t2,
Therefore the phase of the voltage with respect to a fixed frequency reference
when subject to a constant rate of change of frequency changes in proportion to
t2. This is a characteristic difference from a rate of change of frequency function,
which in most conditions can be assumed as changing linearly with time.
A rate of change of frequency of 10 Hz/s results in an angular voltage vector shift
of only 0.72 degrees in the first cycle after the disturbance. This is too small to be
detected by vector shift relays. In fact a typical setting for a voltage vector shift
relay is, normally between 6 and 13 degrees. Therefore a voltage vector shift relay
is not sensitive to the change in voltage phase brought about by change of
frequency alone.
To understand the relation between the resulting voltage vector angle change
following a disturbance and the embedded generator characteristics a simplified
single phase equivalent circuit of a synchronous generator or induction generator
is shown in Figure 2. The voltage VT is the symmetrical terminal voltage of the
generator and the voltage E is the internal voltage lying behind the machine
impedance which is largely reactive (X). When a disturbance causes a change in
current the terminal voltage will jump with respect to its steady state position.
The resultant voltage vector is dependent on the rate of change in current, and the
subtransient impedance of the machine, which is the impedance the generator
presents to a sudden load change. In turn the current change depends on how
strong the source is (short circuit capacity) and the voltage regulation at the
generator terminal which is also affected by the reactive power load connected to
the machine.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 11 of 87
IL X
VT
IL R
IL
Figure 2a: Vector diagram representing steady state condition
jX
IL
VT
Figure 2b; Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters
E
VT
IL
VT
IL
IL X
IL R
IL X
Figure 2c: Transient voltage vector change due to change in load current IL
The voltage vector shift function is designed to respond within one to two full mains
cycles when its threshold is exceeded. Discrimination between a loss of mains
condition and a circuit fault is therefore achievable only by selecting the angle
threshold to be above expected fault levels. This setting can be quantified by
calculating the angular change due to islanding. However this angular change
depends on system topology, power flows and very often also on the instant of the
system faults. For example a bolted three phase short circuit which occurs close to
the relay may cause a problem in that it inherently produces a vector shift angle at
the instant of the fault which is bigger than any normal setting, independent of the
mains condition. This kind of fault would cause the relay to trip shortly after the
instant of its inception. Although this may seem to be a disadvantage of the vector
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 12 of 87
shift function, isolating the embedded generator at the instant of a bolted three
phase fault is of advantage to the PES. This is because the mains short circuit
capacity and consequently the energy feeding the short circuit is limited by the
instant operation of the relay. The fast operation of this vector shift function renders
it to operate at the instant of a disturbance rather than during a gradual change
caused by a gradual change of power flow. Operation can occur at the instant of
inception of the fault, at fault clearance or following non-synchronised reclosure,
which affords additional protection to the embedded generator.
The P341 has a single stage Voltage Vector Shift protection element. This element
measures the change in voltage angle over successive power system half-cycles.
The element operates by measuring the time between zero crossings on the voltage
waveforms. A measurement is taken every half cycle for each phase voltage.
Over a power system cycle this produces 6 results, a trip is issued if 5 of the 6
calculations for the last power system cycle are above the set threshold. Checking
all three phases makes the element less susceptible to incorrect operation due to
harmonic distortion or interference in the measured voltage waveform.
operated (DDB 203). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Voltage Vector Shift protection
element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
V Vector Shift
2.5.1
V Shift Status
Enabled
V Shift Angle
10
Enabled, Disabled
2
30
Setting guidelines for Voltage Vector Shift protection

The element can be selected by setting the V Shift Status cell to Enabled.
The angle change setting threshold, V Shift Angle, should be set to the desired
level.
The setting threshold should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be
detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning.
System simulation testing has shown that a V Shift Angle setting of 10 can
provide stable operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst
operating for a loss of mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine
output for a typical 4MW machine. Although in some circumstances, this setting
may prove to be too sensitive, it is recommended to achieve a successful loss of
mains trip in as many cases as possible. Although the vector shift function may trip
the relay due to a bolted 3 phase fault, it is also essential in securing a trip at the
instant of an out-of-phase autoreclose, where the df/dt function does not trip.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 13 of 87
This setting should be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable in all
applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system load, will
all affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event.
Once installed the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are
adequate to detect a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that
unwanted tripping occurs during normal fault clearance that does not lead to the
loss of mains condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and this should be kept
in mind when optimising settings; non-synchronised manual operation of circuit
breakers must be prevented by disconnection of the embedded machine when the
system becomes separated.
2.6
Reconnection timer
As explained in sections 2.4 and 2.5, due to the sensitivity of the settings applied
to the df/dt and/or the Voltage Vector Shift element, false operation for non loss of
mains events may occur. This could, for example, be due to a close up three phase
fault which can cause operation of a Voltage Vector Shift element. Such operations
will lead to the disconnection of the embedded machine from the external network
and prevent export of power. Alternatively the loss of mains protections may
operate correctly, and auto re-closure equipment may restore the grid supply
following a transient fault.
Disconnection of an embedded generator could lead to a simple loss of revenue.
or in cases where the licensing arrangement demands export of power at times of
peak load may lead to penalty charges being imposed. To minimise the disruption
caused, the P341 includes a reconnection timer. This timer is initiated following
operation of any protection element that could operate due to a loss of mains
event, ie. df/dt, voltage vector shift, under/over frequency, power and under/over
voltage. The timer is blocked should a short circuit fault protection element operate,
i.e residual overvoltage, overcurrent, and earth fault. Once the timer delay has
expired the element will provide a pulsed output signal. This signal can be used to
initiate external synchronising equipment that can re-synchronise the machine with
the system and reclose the CB.
operated (DDB 315). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Reconnect Delay, including the
available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
RECONNECT
DELAY
Reconnect Status
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Reconnect Delay
60 s
0s
300 s
0.01 s
Reconnect tPULSE
1s
0.01 s
30 s
0.01 s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.6.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 14 of 87
Setting guidelines for the Reconnect Delay

The element can be selected by setting the Reconnect Status cell to Enabled.
The timer setting, Reconnect Delay, should be set to the desired delay, this would
typically be longer than the dead time of system auto reclose equipment to ensure
that re-synchronisation is only attempted after the system has been returned to a
normal state. The signal pulse time, Reconnect tPULSE should be set such that the
output pulse is sufficient to securely initiate the auto synchronising equipment when
required.
2.7
Power protection
The power protection elements of the P341 relay calculate the three phase active
power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the IA, IB,
IC inputs on the relay.
P = Vala cosa + Vblb cosb + Vclc cosc
Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently selected
as either Reverse Power, Over Power, Low Forward Power or Disabled, operation
in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be
selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when used for
machine protection and the protected machine CB is open. This will prevent false
operation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as Low Forward
power.
Where the local licensing agreement prevents the export of power into the local
supply Over Power protection may be used as a simple Loss of Mains protection.
In these cases the element can be used to provide alarm and trip stages allowing
the machine operators to closely monitor the machine export capability.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage
(Starts: DDB274, DDB275, Trips: DDB237, 238). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION
TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 15 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1 POWER
Power1 Function
Reverse
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
-P>1 Setting
20 x In W
14 x In W
40 x In W
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80 x In W
56 x In W
160 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P<1 Setting
20 x In W
14 x In W
40 x In W
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80 x In W
56 x In W
160 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P>1 Setting
5 x In W
14 x In W
300 x In W
0.5 x In W
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
56 x In W
1200 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Power1 TimeDelay
5s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Power1 DO Timer
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
P1 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Power2 Function
Low Forward
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
P>2 Setting
5 x In W
14 x In W
40 x In W
0.5 x In W
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
56 x In W
160 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P<2 Setting
5 x In W
14 x In W
40 x In W
0.5 x In W
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
56 x In W
160 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P>2 Setting
5 x In W
14 x In W
300 x In W
0.5 x In W
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
56 x In W
100 x In W
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Power2 TimeDelay
5s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Power2 DO Timer
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
P2 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.7.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 16 of 87
Over Power protection

The Over Power function is a directional element that will operate when power
flows in the forward direction. From the convention, this means power flowing
away from the busbar into the interconnection feeder or out of the protected
machine.
Over Power protection can be used as simple overload indication, or as a back up
protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above
the maximum power rating of the machine.
Alternatively the Over Power function can be used as protection against excessive
export power for an embedded generator. In some installations the machine may
be allowed to operate in parallel with the external supply but the exportation of
power into the external supply may be forbidden. In these cases a simple Over
Power element can be used to monitor the power flow at the interconnection circuit
breaker and trip if power is seen to be exported into the system. For small standby
generators this may be accepted as the Loss of Mains protection.
2.7.1.1 Over Power setting guideline

Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an Over Power
stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Over.
The power threshold setting of the Over Power protection, P>1 Setting or P>2
Setting, should be set greater than the machine full load rated power if providing
overload protection. If the element is used to prevent the export of power into the
external system then the threshold can be set to minimum or just in excess of the
power export allowance.
A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay can be applied.
The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer, would
normally be set to zero.
2.7.2
Low Forward Power protection function

Low forward power may be used where the P341 relay is being used to protect a
small generator. When the CB connecting the generator to the system is tripped,
the electrical load on the machine is cut. This could lead to generator over-speed if
the mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. To reduce the risk of over
speed damage, it is sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the
generator breaker with a low forward power check. This ensures that the generator
set circuit breaker is opened only when the output power is sufficiently low that
over speeding is unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping, until prime mover input
power has been removed, may be deemed acceptable for non-urgent protection
trips; e.g. stator earth fault protection for a high impedance earthed generator. For
urgent trips, e.g. stator short circuit protection the low forward power interlock
should not be used. With the low probability of urgent trips, the risk of over
speed and possible consequences must be accepted.
The Low Forward Power protection can be arranged to interlock non-urgent
tripping using the relay programmable scheme logic. It can also be arranged to
provide a contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via poledead logic.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 17 of 87
2.7.2.1 Low Forward Power setting guideline

Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Low Forward
Power stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Low
Forward.
When required, the threshold setting of the Low Forward Power protection
function, P<1 Setting or P<2 Setting, should be less than 50% of the power
level that could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical
loading. The generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the
protected machine.
The time delay associated with the Low Forward Power protection function,
Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay, could be set to zero. However, some
delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in
the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle closure.
A typical time delay for this reason is 2s.
normally be set to zero when selected to operate Low Forward power elements.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via poledead logic.
This is controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, P1 Poledead Inh or
P2 Poledead Inh, to Enabled.
2.7.3
Reverse Power protection function

Reverse Power protection may be used where the P341 relay is being used to
protect a small generator. A generator is expected to supply power to the
connected system in normal operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a
generator that is connected in parallel with another source of electrical supply will
begin to motor. This reversal of power flow due to loss of prime mover can be
detected by the reverse power element.
The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the
power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types
of generating plant are given in Table 2.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 18 of 87
Prime Mover
Motoring Power
(Percentage rating)
Possible Damage
Diesel Engine
5% 25%
Risk of fire or explosion from

unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness.

Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage.
Gas Turbine
10% 15%
(Split-shaft)
With some gear-driven sets, damage

may arise due to reverse torque on
gear teeth.
>50%
(Single-shaft)
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power
compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit
power loss or damage.
Hydraulic
Turbines
0.2 >2%
(Blades out of water)
Blade and runner cavitation may

occur with a long period of motoring.
>2.0%
(Blades in water)
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow
detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive.
Automatic disconnection is recommended for unattended operation.
Table 2.
Motoring power and possible damage for various types of prime mover.
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure
may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic
initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an
adjustable reset time delay is provided. This delay would need to be set longer
than the period for which the reverse power could fall below the power setting
(P<1 Setting). This setting needs to be taken into account when setting the main
trip time delay. It should also be noted that a delay on reset in excess of half the
period of any system power swings could result in operation of the reverse power
protection during swings.
Reverse Power Protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the
generator set circuit breaker for non-urgent tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1.
Reverse Power interlocking is preferred over Low Forward Power interlocking by
some utilities.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 19 of 87
2.7.3.1 Reverse Power setting guideline

Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Reverse Power
stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Reverse.
The power threshold setting of the Reverse Power protection, P>1 Setting or
P>2 Setting, should be less than 50% of the motoring power, typical values for
the level of reverse power for generators are given in Table 2.
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips
or alarms being given during power system disturbances or following
synchronisation. A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay
of 5s should be applied typically.
normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset
time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that
false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event.
An additional, more sensitive Reverse Power relay, may be required in the case of
hydro machines, where the minimum setting provided by the P341 relay is too
high. Such dedicated relays can be fed from measurement class CTs providing
more accurate determination of low levels of power. An external relay can be
integrated into the overall protection/monitoring/recording scheme via the P341
programmable scheme logic.
2.8
Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent relays are the most commonly used protective devices in any industrial
or distribution power system. They provide main protection to both feeders and
busbars when unit protection is not used. They are also commonly applied to
provide back-up protection when unit systems, such as pilot wire schemes, are
used.
By a combination of time delays and relay pick-up settings, overcurrent relays may
be applied to either feeders or power transformers to provide discriminative phase
fault protection (and also earth fault protection if system earth fault levels are
sufficiently high). In such applications, the various overcurrent relays on the system
are co-ordinated with one another such that the relay nearest to the fault operates
first. This is referred to as cascade operation because if the relay nearest to the
fault does not operate, the next upstream relay will trip in a slightly longer time.
The overcurrent protection included in the P341 relay provides four stage nondirectional/directional three phase overcurrent protection with independent time
delay characteristics. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three
phases but are independent for each of the four stages.
The first two stages of overcurrent protection have time delayed characteristics
which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite
time (DT). The third and fourth stages have definite time characteristics only.
Various methods are available to achieve correct relay co-ordination on a system;
by means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and current.
Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable
difference in fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used
by some utilities but can often lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near
source substations where the fault level is highest. For these reasons the most
commonly applied characteristic in co-ordinating overcurrent relays is the IDMT
type.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 20 of 87
Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL
(DDB142, DDB143, DDB144, DDB145). This allows the overcurrent protection to
be integrated into busbar protection schemes, as shown in Section 2.18, or can be
used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available
to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts:DDB276-283, Trips:- DDB239-246). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION
The following table shows the relay menu for the overcurrent protection, including
the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function
IEC S Inverse
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,

IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse,
IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse,
US ST Inverse
I>1 Direction
Non-Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd,

Directional Rev
I>1 Current Set
1 x In A
0.08 x In A
4.0 x In A
0.01 x In A
I>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
I>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
I>1 Reset Char
DT
I>1 tRESET
0s
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I>2
Cells as for I>1
above
I>3 Status
I>3 Direction
Disabled
Disabled or Enabled
Non-Directional

Directional Rev
I>3 Current set
20 x In A
0.08 x In A
32 x In A
0.01 x In A
I>3 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 21 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
95
+95
I>4
Cells as for I>3
above
I> Char Angle
45
I> Function Link
00001111
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 I>2 VTS Block,

Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used
{See Note}
Note:
VTS Block When relevant bit set to 1, operation of Voltage Transformer
Supervision (VTS) will block stage if directionalised. When set to 0, stage will
revert to non-directional.
The inverse time delayed characteristics listed above, comply with the following
formula:
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
K
t=Tx
(I/Is )
+L
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=
where t
K
operation time
constant
TD
7
K
(I/Is)
+L
I =
IS =
measured current
constant
ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD =
current threshold setting
Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 22 of 87
IDMT characteristics
Standard
K
constant
constant
L
constant
Standard inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
Very inverse
IEC
13.5
Extremely inverse
IEC
80
Long time inverse
UK
120
Moderately inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Very inverse
IEEE
19.61
0.491
Extremely inverse
IEEE
28.2
0.1217
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
0.18
Short time inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
IDMT curve
description
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with
regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the
operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the
IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic
characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the
TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK
curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS
setting.
2.8.1
Transformer Magnetising Inrush

When applying overcurrent protection to the HV side of a power transformer, it is
usual to apply a high set instantaneous overcurrent element, in addition to the time
delayed low-set, to reduce fault clearance times for HV fault conditions. Typically,
this will be set to approximately 1.3 times the LV fault level, such that it will only
operate for HV faults. A 30% safety margin is sufficient due to the low transient
overreach of the third and fourth overcurrent stages. Transient overreach defines
the response of a relay to DC components of fault current and is quoted as a
percentage. A relay with a low transient overreach will be largely insensitive to a
DC offset and may therefore be set more closely to the steady state AC waveform.
The second requirement for this element is that it should remain inoperative during
transformer energisation, when a large primary current flows for a transient
period. In most applications, the requirement to set the relay above the LV fault
level will automatically result in settings that will be above the level of magnetising
inrush current.
Due to the nature of operation of the third and fourth overcurrent stages in the
P341 relays, it is possible to apply settings corresponding to 35% of the peak
inrush current, whilst maintaining stability for the condition.
This is important where low-set instantaneous stages are used to initiate autoreclose
equipment. In such applications, the instantaneous stage should not operate for
inrush conditions, which may arise from small teed-off transformer loads for
example. However, the setting must also be sensitive enough to provide fast
operation under fault conditions.
Where an instantaneous element is required to accompany the time delayed
protection, as described above, the third or fourth overcurrent stage of the P341
relay should be used, as they have wider setting ranges.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.8.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 23 of 87
Application of Timer Hold facility

The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P341 relays are provided with
a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value.
(Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be
set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting
cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the
overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls
below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than
zero delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may
be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream
electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays.
Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault
clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of
this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the
fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault.
This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing
duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes
permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be
repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent.
By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses,
thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as
settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET, respectively. Note that this cell is not visible
if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then
determined by the programmed time dial setting.
2.8.3
Setting guidelines
When applying the overcurrent protection provided in the P341 relays, standard
principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings
for co-ordination. The setting example detailed below shows a typical setting
calculation and describes how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
Assume the following parameters for a relay feeding an LV switchboard:
CT Ratio = 500/1
Full Load Current of circuit = 450A
Slowest downstream protection = 100A Fuse
The current setting employed on the P341 relay must account for both the
maximum load current and the reset ratio of the relay itself:-
I> must be greater than: 450/0.95 = 474A

The P341 relay allows the current settings to be applied to the relay in either
primary or secondary quantities. Programming the Setting Values cell of the
CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary does this.
When this cell is set to primary, all phase overcurrent setting values are scaled by
the programmed CT ratio. This is found in column 0A of the relay menu, entitled
VT & CT RATIOS, where cells Phase CT Primary and Phase CT Secy can be
programmed with the primary and secondary CT ratings, respectively.
In this example, assuming primary currents are to be used, the ratio should be
programmed as 500/1.
The required setting is therefore 0.95A in terms of secondary current or 475A in
terms of primary.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 24 of 87
A suitable time delayed characteristic will now need to be chosen. When coordinating with downstream fuses, the applied relay characteristic should be
closely matched to the fuse characteristic. Therefore, assuming IDMT co-ordination
is to be used, an Extremely Inverse (EI) characteristic would normally be chosen.
As previously described, this is found under I>1 Function and should therefore be
programmed as IEC E Inverse.
Finally, a suitable time multiplier setting (TMS) must be calculated and entered in
cell I>1 TMS.
For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference
should be made to ALSTOMs Protective Relay Application Guide Chapter 9.
2.9
Directional overcurrent protection

If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary
to add directionality to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct coordination. Typical systems that require such protection are parallel feeders (both
plain and transformer) and ring main systems, each of which are relatively
common in distribution networks.
In order to give directionality to an overcurrent relay, it is necessary to provide it
with a suitable reference, or polarising, signal. The reference generally used is the
system voltage, as its angle remains relatively constant under fault conditions.
The phase fault elements of the P341 relay are internally polarised by the
quadrature phase-phase voltages, as shown in the table below:Phase of protection
Operate current
Polarising voltage
A Phase
IA
IB
IC
VBC
B Phase
C Phase
VCA
VAB
It is therefore important to ensure the correct phasing of all current and voltage
inputs to the relay, in line with the supplied application diagram.
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will lag its nominal phase
voltage by an angle dependent upon the system X/R ratio. It is therefore a
requirement that the relay operates with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in
this region. This is achieved by means of the relay characteristic angle (RCA)
setting; this defines the angle by which the current applied to the relay must be
displaced from the voltage applied to the relay to obtain maximum relay sensitivity.
This is set in cell I>Char Angle in the Overcurrent menu.
Figure 3 shows a typical distribution system utilising parallel power transformers.
In such an application, a fault at F could result in the operation of both R3 and R4
relays and the subsequent loss of supply to the 11kV busbar. Hence, with this
system configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays at these locations
set to look into their respective transformers. These relays should co-ordinate with
the non-directional relays, R1 and R2; hence ensuring discriminative relay
operation during such fault conditions.
In such an application, relays R3 and R4 may commonly require non-directional
overcurrent protection elements to provide protection to the 11kV busbar, in
addition to providing a back-up function to the overcurrent relays on the outgoing
feeders (R5).
When applying the P341 relays in the above application, stage 1 of the
overcurrent protection of relays R3 and R4 would be set non-directional and time
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 25 of 87
33kV
R2
OC/EF
R1
OC/EF
SBEF
F
R3
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
R4
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
11kV
R5
OC/EF
Loads
Figure 3:
Typical distribution system using parallel transformers
graded with R5, using an appropriate time delay characteristic. Stage 2 could
then be set directional, looking back into the transformer, also having a
characteristic which provided correct co-ordination with R1 and R2. IDMT or DT
characteristics are selectable for both stages 1 and 2 and directionality of each of
the overcurrent stages is set in cell I> Direction
Note that the principles previously outlined for the parallel transformer application
are equally applicable for plain feeders which are operating in parallel.
2.9.1
Synchronous polarisation
For a fault condition that occurs close to the relaying point, the faulty phase
voltage will reduce to a value close to zero volts. For single or double phase faults,
there will always be at least one healthy phase voltage present for polarisation of
the phase overcurrent elements. For example, a close up A to B fault condition will
result in the collapse of the A and B phase voltages. However, the A and B phase
elements are polarised from VBC and VCA respectively. As such a polarising
signal will be present, allowing correct relay operation.
For a close up three phase fault, all three voltages will collapse to zero and no
healthy phase voltages will be present. For this reason, the P341 relays include a
synchronous polarisation feature that stores the pre-fault voltage information and
continues to apply it to the DOC elements for a time period of 3.2 seconds.
This ensures that either instantaneous or time delayed DOC elements will be
allowed to operate, even with a three phase voltage collapse.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.9.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 26 of 87
Setting guidelines
The applied current settings for directional overcurrent relays are dependent upon
the application in question. In a parallel feeder arrangement, load current is
always flowing in the non-operate direction. Hence, the relay current setting may
be less than the full load rating of the circuit; typically 50% of In.
Note that the minimum setting that may be applied has to take into account the
thermal rating of the relay. Some electro-mechanical directional overcurrent relays
have continuous withstand ratings of only twice the applied current setting and
hence 50% of rating was the minimum setting that could be applied. With modern
relays such as the P341, the continuous current rating is 3 x rated current and so it
is possible to apply much more sensitive settings, if required. However a setting of
50% of rating provides extra security against mal-operation for HV side faults in
parallel transformer applications where forward current may be seen in one or
more phases of a reverse looking relay.
The required characteristic angle settings for directional relays will differ
depending on the exact application in which they are used.
Recommended characteristic angle settings are as follows: Plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point (zero sequence source)
behind the relay location, should utilise a +30 RCA setting.
Transformer feeders, or applications with a zero sequence source in front of the
relay location, should utilise a +45 RCA setting.
On the P341 relay, it is possible to set characteristic angles anywhere in the range
95 to +95. Whilst it is possible to set the RCA to exactly match the system fault
angle, it is recommended that the above guidelines are adhered to, as these
settings have been shown to provide satisfactory performance and stability under a
wide range of system conditions.
2.10
Earth fault protection

The P341 relay has a total of four input current transformers; one for each of the
phase current inputs and one for supplying the sensitive earth fault protection
element. Residual, or earth fault, current can be derived from the sum of the phase
current inputs. With this flexible input arrangement, various combinations of
standard, sensitive (SEF) and restricted earth fault (REF) protection may be
configured within the relay.
It should be noted that in order to achieve the sensitive setting range that is
available in the P341 relay for SEF protection, the input CT is designed specifically
to operate at low current magnitudes. This common input is used to drive either the
SEF or REF protection which are enabled / disabled accordingly within the relay
menu.
2.10.1
Standard Earth Fault protection element

The four stage Standard Earth Fault protection operates from earth fault current
which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents.
The first and second stages have selectable IDMT or DT characteristics, whilst the
third and fourth stages are DT only. Each stage is selectable to be either nondirectional, directional forward or directional reverse. The Timer Hold facility,
previously described for the overcurrent elements, is available on each of the first
two stages.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 27 of 87
to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection,
(Starts:- DDB292-295, Trips:- DDB204-207). The state of the DDB signals can be
The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including
the available setting ranges and factory defaults.:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT 1
IN>1 Function
IEC S Inverse
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse,

IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse,
IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
US Inverse, US ST Inverse
IN>1 Direction
Non-Directional

Directional Rev
IN>1 Current
0.2 x In A
0.08 x In A
4.0 x In A
0.01 x In A
IN>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
IN1>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
IN1>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
IN>1 Reset Char
DT
IN>1 tRESET
0s
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
0.01 s
IN>2
Cells as for IN>1
above
IN>3 Status
IN>3 Direction
Disabled
Disabled or Enabled
Non-Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>3 Current set
20 x In A
0.08 x In A
32 x In A
0.01 x In A
IN>3 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 28 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
IN>4
Cells as for IN>3
above
IN> Function Link
{See Note}
00001111
IN> DIRECTIONAL
IN> Char Angle

Bit 4, 5 6&7 Not Used
Sub Heading
60
95
+95
IN1> Pol
Zero Sequence
IN1>VNpol Set
5V
0.5V
22V
0.5V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20V
2V
88V
2V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
IN1>V2pol Set
5V
0.5V
22V
0.5V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20V
2V
88V
2V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
IN1>I2pol Set
0.08 x In A
Zero Sequence , Neg Sequence
0.08 x In A
1 x In A
0.015 x In A
Note:
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if
directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional.
For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those of the
phase overcurrent elements, Section 2.9.
The multiple stages may be enabled in the relay at the same time, this provides
some application advantages. For example, the parallel transformer application
shown in Figure 1 requires directional earth fault protection at locations R3 and
R4, to provide discriminative protection. However, in order to provide back-up
protection for the busbar and other downstream earth fault devices, non-directional
earth fault protection can also be applied.
Where a neutral earthing resistor (NER) is used to limit the earth fault level, it is
possible that an earth fault condition could cause a flashover of the NER and
hence a dramatic increase in the earth fault current. For this reason, it may be
appropriate to apply two stage EF protection. The first stage should have current
and time characteristics which co-ordinate with downstream earth fault protection.
A second stage may then be set with a higher current setting greater than the NER
limited fault current but with zero time delay; hence providing fast clearance of an
earth fault which gives rise to an NER flashover.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.10.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 29 of 87
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection element (SEF)

If a system is earthed through high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault
resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied
earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a sensitive
setting range in order to be effective. A separate 4 stage Sensitive Earth Fault
element is provided within the P341 relay for this purpose, this has a dedicated CT
input.
to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection,
(Starts:- DDB296-299, Trips:- DDB209-212). The state of the DDB signals can be
The following table shows the relay menu for the Sensitive Earth Fault protection,
including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROTN
Sens E/F Options
SEF
SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF
ISEF>1 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,

IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse,
IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse,
US ST Inverse
ISEF>1 Direction
Non-Directional
ISEF>1 Current
0.05 x In A
0.002 x In A
0.1 x In A
0.00025 x In A
ISEF>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
ISEF>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
ISEF>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
ISEF>1 Reset Char
DT
ISEF>1 tRESET
1s
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
ISEF>2
Cells as for ISEF>1
above
ISEF>3 Status
Disabled
Disabled or Enabled
0.01 s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 30 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
ISEF>3 Direction
Non-Directional
ISEF>3 Current
0.2 x In A
0.002 x In A
0.8 x In A
0.002 x In A
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
ISEF>3 Time Delay
ISEF>4
Cells as for ISEF>3
above
ISEF> Func Link
{See Note}
00001111
Bit 0 ISEF>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 ISEF>2 VTS Block,

Bit 2 ISEF>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 ISEF>4 VTS Block,
Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used
ISEF DIRECTIONAL
ISEF> Char Angle
ISEF>VNpol Set
WATTMETRIC SEF
PN> Setting
Sub Heading
90
95
+95
5V
0.5V
22V
0.5V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20V
2V
88V
2V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Sub Heading
9 x In W
0 x In W
20 x In W
0.05 x In W
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
36 x In W
0 x In W
80 x In W
0.2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Note:
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if
directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional.
For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those of the
phase overcurrent elements, Section 2.9 .
Notes:As can be seen from the menu, the Sens E/F Options cell has a number of setting
options. To enable standard, four stage SEF protection, the SEF option should be
selected, which is the default setting. However, if wattmetric or restricted earth fault
protection is required, then one of the remaining options should be selected. These
are described in more detail in Sections 2.11.6 and 2.11.7. The WATTMETRIC
and RESTRICTED E/F cells will only appear in the menu if the functions have been
selected in the Options cell.
As shown in the previous menu, each SEF stage is selectable to be either nondirectional, directional forward or directional reverse in the ISEF> Direction cell.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 31 of 87
The Timer Hold facility, previously described for the overcurrent elements in section
2.9, is available on each of the first two stages and is set in the same manner.
Settings related to directionalising the SEF protection are described in detail in the
following section.
SEF would normally be fed from a core balance current transformer (CBCT)
mounted around the three phases of the feeder cable. However, care must be
taken in the positioning of the CT with respect to the earthing of the cable sheath.
See Figure 4 below:-
Cable gland
Cable box
Cable gland/sheath
earth connection
SEF
Incorrect
SEF
No operation
Correct
Operation
SEF
Figure 4:
Positioning of core balance current transformers
As can be seen from the diagram, if the cable sheath is terminated at the cable
gland and earthed directly at that point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will
not result in any unbalance current in the core balance CT. Prior to earthing, the
connection must be brought back through the CBCT and earthed on the feeder
side. This ensures correct relay operation during earth fault conditions.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.11
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 32 of 87
Directional Earth Fault protection (DEF)

Each of the four stages of standard earth fault protection and SEF protection may
be set to be directional if required. Consequently, as with the application of
directional overcurrent protection, a voltage supply is required by the relay to
provide the necessary polarisation.
With the standard earth fault protection element in the P341 relay, two options are
available for polarisation; Residual Voltage or Negative Sequence.
2.11.1
Residual voltage polarisation

With earth fault protection, the polarising signal requires to be representative of
the earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault
conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The P341
relay can internally derive this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input, or can
measure the voltage via the neutral displacement or residual overvoltage input.
The method of measuring the polarising signal is set in the IN> Vnpol Input cell.
Where the residual voltage is derived from the 3 phase voltages a 5-limb or three
single phase VTs must be used. These types of VT design allow the passage of
residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual
voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb
VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay.
It is possible that small levels of residual voltage will be present under normal
system conditions due to system imbalances, VT inaccuracies, relay tolerances etc.
Hence, the P341 relay includes a user settable threshold, IN>VNpol Set, which
must be exceeded in order for the DEF function to be operational. The residual
voltage measurement provided in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column of the menu
may assist in determining the required threshold setting during the commissioning
stage, as this will indicate the level of standing residual voltage present.
Note that residual voltage is nominally 180 out of phase with residual current.
Consequently, the DEF relays are polarised from the Vres quantity. This 180
phase shift is automatically introduced within the P341 relay.
2.11.2

In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either
be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would
be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb
VT was fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line
application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist.
In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative
phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault
direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity,
however, is still residual current. This is available for selection on the derived earth
fault element but not on the SEF protection. It requires a voltage and current
threshold to be set in cells IN> V2pol Set & IN> I2pol Set, respectively.
2.11.3
General setting guidelines for DEF

When setting the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional overcurrent
element, a positive angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that the
quadrature polarising voltage lagged the nominal phase current by 90 ie. the
position of the current under fault conditions was leading the polarising voltage
and hence a positive RCA was required. With DEF, the residual current under fault
conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarising voltage. Hence, negative RCA
settings are required for DEF applications. This is set in cell I>Char Angle in the
relevant earth fault menu.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 33 of 87
The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarised
relay:Resistance earthed systems 0
Distribution systems (solidly earthed) 45
Transmission Systems (solidly earthed) 60
For negative sequence polarisation, the RCA settings must be based on the angle
of the nps source impedance.
2.11.4
Application to insulated systems

The advantage gained by running a power system which is insulated from earth is
the fact that during a single phase to earth fault condition, no earth fault current is
allowed to flow. Consequently, it is possible to maintain power flow on the system
even when an earth fault condition is present. However, this advantage is offset by
the fact that the resultant steady state and transient overvoltages on the sound
phases can be very high. It is generally the case, therefore, that insulated systems
will only be used in low/medium voltage networks where it does not prove too
costly to provide the necessary insulation against such overvoltages. Higher system
voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance.
Operational advantages may be gained by the use of insulated systems. However,
it is still vital that detection of the fault is achieved. This is not possible by means of
standard current operated earth fault protection. One possibility for fault detection
is by means of a residual overvoltage device. This functionality is included within
the P341 relays and is detailed in Section 2.12. However, fully discriminative
earth fault protection on this type of system can only be achieved by the
application of a sensitive earth fault element. This type of relay is set to detect the
resultant imbalance in the system charging currents that occurs under earth fault
conditions. It is therefore essential that a core balance CT is used for this
application. This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight
mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower
CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection sensitivity to be
more easily achieved.
Consider Figure 5:-
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 34 of 87
a1
b1
R1
- jXc1
H1
a2
b2
R2
- jXc2
H2
a3
b3
H1 + H2 + H3
R3
- jXc3
R3 = H1 + H2 + H3 - H3
H3
H1 + H2
R3 = H1 + H2
Figure 5:
Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault
From Figure 5, it can be seen that the relays on the healthy feeders see the
unbalance in the charging currents for their own feeder. The relay on the faulted
feeder, however, sees the charging current from the rest of the system (IH1 and
IH2 in this case), with its own feeders charging current (IH3) becoming cancelled
out. This is further illustrated by the phasor diagrams shown in Figure 6.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 35 of 87
Vaf
Restrain
Vapf
IR1
Ib1
Operate
Ia1
Vbf
Vcpf
Vbpf
Vres
(=3Vo)
An RCA setting of +90
shifts the MTA to here
Figure 6:
IR3 = (IH1+ IH2)
Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault
Referring to the phasor diagram, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault
causes the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of 3. The A phase
charging current (Ia1), is then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage
by 90. Likewise, the B phase charging current leads the resultant Vb by 90.
The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the
healthy feeders can be seen to be the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving a
residual current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the polarising voltage (3Vo).
As the healthy phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the charging currents
on these phases will also be 3 times larger than their steady state values.
Therefore, the magnitude of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the steady state
per phase charging current.
The phasor diagrams indicate that the residual currents on the healthy and faulted
feeders, IR1 and IR3 respectively, are in anti-phase. A directional element could
therefore be used to provide discriminative earth fault protection.
If the polarising voltage of this element, equal to 3Vo, is shifted through +90, the
residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder will lie within the operate
region of the directional characteristic and the current on the healthy feeders will
fall within the restrain region.
As previously stated, the required characteristic angle setting for the SEF element
when applied to insulated systems, is +90. It should be noted though, that this
recommended setting corresponds to the relay being connected such that its
direction of current flow for operation is from the source busbar towards the
feeder, as would be the convention for a relay on an earthed system. However, if
the forward direction for operation was set as being from the feeder into the
busbar, (which some utilities may standardise on), then a 90( RCA would be
required. The correct relay connections to give a defined direction for operation
are shown on the relay connection diagram.
Note that discrimination can be provided without the need for directional control.
This can only be achieved if it is possible to set the relay in excess of the charging
current of the protected feeder and below the charging current for the rest of the
system.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.11.5
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 36 of 87
Setting guidelines insulated systems

As has been previously shown, the residual current detected by the relay on the
faulted feeder is equal to the sum of the charging currents flowing from the rest of
the system. Further, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on
each feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times
the per phase value. Therefore, the total unbalance current detected by the relay is
equal to three times the per phase charging current of the rest of the system.
A typical relay setting may therefore be in the order of 30% of this value, ie. equal
to the per phase charging current of the remaining system. Practically though, the
required setting may well be determined on site, where suitable settings can be
adopted based upon practically obtained results. The use of the P140 relays
comprehensive measurement and fault recording facilities may prove useful in this
respect.
2.11.6
Application to Petersen Coil earthed systems

Power systems are usually earthed in order to limit transient overvoltages during
arcing faults and also to assist with detection and clearance of earth faults.
Impedance earthing has the advantage of limiting damage incurred by plant
during earth fault conditions and also limits the risk of explosive failure of
switchgear, which is a danger to personnel. In addition, it limits touch and step
potentials at a substation or in the vicinity of an earth fault.
If a high impedance device is used for earthing the system, or the system is
unearthed, the earth fault current will be reduced but the steady state and transient
overvoltages on the sound phases can be very high. Consequently, it is generally
the case that high impedance earthing will only be used in low/medium voltage
networks in which it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation
against such overvoltages. Higher system voltages would normally be solidly
earthed or earthed via a low impedance.
A special case of high impedance earthing via a reactor occurs when the inductive
earthing reactance is made equal to the total system capacitive reactance to earth
at system frequency. This practice is widely referred to as Petersen (or resonant)
Coil Earthing. With a correctly tuned system, the steady state earthfault current will
be zero, so that arcing earth faults become self extinguishing. Such a system can,
if designed to do so, be run with one phase earthed for a long period until the
cause of the fault is identified and rectified. With the effectiveness of this method
being dependent upon the correct tuning of the coil reactance to the system
capacitive reactance, an expansion of the system at any time would clearly
necessitate an adjustment of the coil reactance. Such adjustment is sometimes
automated.
Petersen Coil earthed systems are commonly found in areas where the power
system consists mainly of rural overhead lines and can be particularly beneficial in
locations which are subject to a high incidence of transient faults. Transient earth
faults caused by lightning strikes, for example, can be extinguished by the Petersen
Coil without the need for line outages.
Figure 7 shows a source of generation earthed through a Petersen Coil, with an
earth fault applied on the A Phase. Under this situation, it can be seen that the A
phase shunt capacitance becomes short circuited by the fault. Consequently, the
calculations show that if the reactance of the earthing coil is set correctly, the
resulting steady state earth fault current will be zero.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 37 of 87
-Ib
- Ic
If = -Ib - Ic + Van
Vba
-jXc
(-Ib) (-Ic)
jXL
= 0 if Van = Ib + Ic
jXL
(IL)
jXL
Vba
-jXc
Vca
-jXc
-jXc
If
-jXc
-jXc
-IC
A
IL
-IB
N
C
Current vectors for A phase fault
Figure 7:
Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system
Prior to actually applying protective relays to provide earth fault protection on

systems which are earthed via a Petersen Coil, it is imperative to gain an
understanding of the current distributions that occur under fault conditions on such
systems. With this knowledge, it is then possible to decide on the type of relay that
may be applied, ensuring that it is both set and connected correctly.
Figure 8 shows a radial distribution system having a source which is earthed via a
Petersen Coil. Three outgoing feeders are present, the lower of which has a phase
to earth fault applied on the C phase.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 38 of 87
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
-jXc1
IH1
IL
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
jXL
-jXc2
IH2
Ia3
Ib3
Ic3=IF
IR3
IL = IF + IH1 + IH2 - IH3
IL
Figure 8:
-jXc3
IF
IH3
IH1+IH2
Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault
Figures 9 (a, b and c) show vector diagrams for the previous system, assuming that
it is fully compensated (i.e. coil reactance fully tuned to system capacitance), in
addition to assuming a theoretical situation where no resistance is present either in
the earthing coil or in the feeder cables.
Referring to the vector diagram illustrated in figure 9a, it can be seen that the C
phase to earth fault causes the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of
3. The A phase charging currents (Ia1, Ia2 and Ia3), are then shown to be
leading the resultant A phase voltage by 90 and likewise for the B phase
charging currents with respect to the resultant Vb.
The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the
healthy feeders can be seen to be a simple vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving
a residual current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the residual voltage (Figure
9b). Clearly, as the healthy phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the
charging currents on these phases will also be 3 times larger than their steady
state values. Therefore, the magnitude of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the
steady state per phase charging current.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 39 of 87
IH3
IL
3Vo
IH2
IH1
a) Capacitive & inductive currents
Ib1
Ia1
N
IL
IR1 = IH1
IH1
Ib1
b) Unfaulted line
-IH2
c) Faulted line
IR3
Ia1
Vres = -3Vo
Figure 9:
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
Vres=-3Vo
Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc
Note:
The actual residual voltage used as a reference signal for directional earth fault
relays is phase shifted by 180 and is therefore shown as 3Vo in the vector
diagrams. This phase shift is automatically introduced within the P140 relays.
On the faulted feeder, the residual current is the addition of the charging current
on the healthy phases (IH3) plus the fault current (IF).The net unbalance is therefore
equal to IL-IH1-IH2, as shown in Figure 9c.
This situation may be more readily observed by considering the zero sequence
network for this fault condition. This is depicted in Figure 10.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 40 of 87
I0F
IR0F
IR0H
IR0H
IL
Vo
3XL
Faulted feeder
Healthy feeders
IH3 IH2 IH1

Xco
Key:
IR0F = Residual current on faulted feeder
IR0H = Residual current on healthy feeder
It can therefore be seen that:I0F = IL IH1 IH2 IH3
IR0F = IH3 + I0F
So:
IR0F = IL IH1 IH2
Figure 10: Zero sequence network showing residual currents
In comparing the residual currents occurring on the healthy and on the faulted
feeders (Figures 9b & 9c), it can be seen that the currents would be similar in both
magnitude and phase; hence it would not be possible to apply a relay which could
provide discrimination.
However, as previously stated, the scenario of no resistance being present in the
coil or feeder cables is purely theoretical. Further consideration therefore needs to
be given to a practical application in which the resistive component is no longer
ignored consider Figure 11.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Resistive component
in grounding coil
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 41 of 87
Resistive component in feeder
(IH1 + IH2 + IH3)

IL
3Vo
a) Capacitive & inductive currents

with resistive components
N
C
Restrain
Operate
IL
Zero torque line

for 0 RCA
IR1 = IH1
b) Unfaulted line
c) Faulted line
-IH1 -IH2
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
IR3
Restrain
Vres = 3Vo
Zero torque line for 0 RCA
Vres =- 3Vo
Operate
Figure 11: Practical case:- resistance present in XL and Xc
Figure 11a again shows the relationship between the capacitive currents, coil
current and residual voltage. It can now be seen that due to the presence of
resistance in the feeders, the healthy phase charging currents are now leading
their respective phase voltages by less than 90. In a similar manner, the resistance
present in the earthing coil has the effect of shifting the current, IL, to an angle less
than 90 lagging. The result of these slight shifts in angles can be seen in Figures
11b and 11c.
The residual current now appears at an angle in excess of 90 from the polarising
voltage for the unfaulted feeder and less than 90 on the faulted feeder. Hence, a
directional relay having a characteristic angle setting of 0 (with respect to the
polarising signal of 3Vo) could be applied to provide discrimination. i.e. the
healthy feeder residual current would appear within the restrain section of the
characteristic but the residual current on the faulted feeder would lie within the
operate region as shown in diagrams 11b and 11c.
In practical systems, it may be found that a value of resistance is purposely inserted
in parallel with the earthing coil. This serves two purposes; one is to actually
increase the level of earth fault current to a more practically detectable level and
the second is to increase the angular difference between the residual signals;
again to aid in the application of discriminating protection.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.12
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 42 of 87
Operation of sensitive earth fault element

It has been shown that the angular difference between the residual currents on the
healthy and faulted feeders allows the application of a directional relay whose
zero torque line passes between the two currents. Two possibilities exist for the
type of protection element that may consequently be applied for earth fault
detection;
1) A suitably sensitive directional earth fault relay having a relay characteristic
angle setting (RCA) of zero degrees, with the possibility of fine adjustment
about this threshold.
2) A sensitive directional zero sequence wattmetric relay having similar
requirements to 1. above with respect to the required RCA settings.
Both stages 1 and 2 of the sensitive earth fault element of the P140 relay are
settable down to 0.2% of rated current and would therefore fulfill the requirements
of the first method listed above and could therefore be applied successfully.
However, many utilities (particularly in central Europe) have standardized on the
wattmetric method of earth fault detection, which is described in the following
section.
Zero sequence power measurement, as a derivative of Vo and Io, offers improved
relay security against false operation with any spurious core balance CT output for
non earth fault conditions. This is also the case for a sensitive directional earth fault
relay having an adjustable Vo polarising threshold.
Wattmetric Characteristic
The previous analysis has shown that a small angular difference exists between the
spill current on the healthy and faulted feeders. It can be seen that this angular
difference gives rise to active components of current which are in antiphase to one
another. This is shown in Figure 12 below;
Vres = 3Vo
Active component
of residual current:
Faulted Feeder
IR3
Operate
IH1 IH2
IL
Active component
of residual current:
Healthy Feeder
IR1
Zero torque line
for 0 RCA
Restrain
Figure 12: Resistive components of spill current
Consequently, the active components of zero sequence power will also lie in
similar planes and so a relay capable of detecting active power would be able to
make a discriminatory decision. i.e. if the wattmetric component of zero sequence
power was detected in the forward direction, then this would be indicative of a
fault on that feeder; if power was detected in the reverse direction, then the fault
must be present on an adjacent feeder or at the source.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 43 of 87
For operation of the directional earth fault element within the P140 relays, all three
of the settable thresholds on the relay must be exceeded; namely the current
"ISEF>", the voltage "ISEF>VNpol Set" and the power "PN> Setting".
As can be seen from the following formula, the power setting within the relay menu
is called PN> and is therefore calculated using residual rather than zero sequence
quantities. Residual quantities are three times their respective zero sequence values
and so the complete formula for operation is as shown below:
Vres x Ires X Cos ( c) = 9 x Vo x Io x Cos ( c)
where;
Angle between the Polarising Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current
Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) Setting (ISEF> Char Angle)
Vres =
Residual Voltage
Ires =
Residual Current
Vo
Zero Sequence Voltage
Io
Zero Sequence Current
The action of setting the PN> threshold to zero would effectively disable the
wattmetric function and the relay would operate as a basic, sensitive directional
earth fault element. However, if this is required, then the 'SEF' option can be
selected from the 'Sens E/F Options' cell in the menu.
A further point to note is that when a power threshold other than zero is selected, a
slight alteration is made to the angular boundaries of the directional characteristic.
Rather than being 90 from the RCA, they are made slightly narrower at 85.
2.13
Application considerations
Required relay current and voltage connections
Referring to the relevant application diagram for the P140 Relay, it should be
applied such that its direction for forward operation is looking down into the
protected feeder (away from the busbar), with a 0 RCA setting.
As illustrated in the relay application diagram, it is usual for the earth fault element
to be driven from a core balance current transformer (CBCT). This eliminates the
possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually
connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby
allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
2.13.1
Calculation of required relay settings

As has been previously shown, for a fully compensated system, the residual current
detected by the relay on the faulted feeder is equal to the coil current minus the
sum of the charging currents flowing from the rest of the system. Further, as stated
in the previous section, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on
each feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times
the steady state per phase value. Therefore, for a fully compensated system, the
total unbalance current detected by the relay is equal to three times the per phase
charging current of the faulted circuit. A typical relay setting may therefore be in
the order of 30% of this value, i.e. equal to the per phase charging current of the
faulted circuit. Practically though, the required setting may well be determined on
site, where system faults can be applied and suitable settings can be adopted
based upon practically obtained results.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 44 of 87
Also, it should be noted that in most situations, the system will not be fully
compensated and consequently a small level of steady state fault current will be
allowed to flow. The residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder may
thus be a larger value, which further emphasizes the fact that relay settings should
be based upon practical current levels, wherever possible.
The above also holds true regarding the required Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
setting. As has been shown earlier, a nominal RCA setting of 0 is required.
However, fine tuning of this setting will require to be carried out on site in order to
obtain the optimum setting in accordance with the levels of coil and feeder
resistances present. The loading and performance of the CT will also have an effect
in this regard. The effect of CT magnetising current will be to create phase lead of
current. Whilst this would assist with operation of faulted feeder relays it would
reduce the stability margin of healthy feeder relays. A compromize can therefore
be reached through fine adjustment of the RCA. This is adjustable in 1 steps on
the P140 relays.
2.13.2
Application of settings to the relay

All of the relevant settings can be found under the SENSITIVE E/F column within the
relay menu. Within the Sens E/F Options cell, there are two possibilities for
selecting wattmetric earth fault protection; either on its own or in conjunction with
low impedance REF protection, which is described in Section 2.10.
Note that the residual power setting, PN>, is scaled by the programmed CT and
VT ratios in the relay.
2.14
Restricted earth fault protection

Earth faults occurring on a transformer winding or terminal may be of limited
magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the
percentage of transformer winding that is involved in the fault. In general,
particularly as the size of the transformer increases, it becomes unacceptable to
rely on time delayed protection to clear winding or terminal faults as this would
lead to an increased amount of damage to the transformer. A common requirement
is therefore to provide instantaneous phase and earth fault protection. Applying
differential protection across the transformer may fulfill these requirements.
However, an earth fault occurring on the LV winding, particularly if it is of a limited
level, may not be detected by the differential relay, as it is only measuring the
corresponding HV current. Therefore, instantaneous protection that is restricted to
operating for transformer earth faults only is applied. This is referred to as
restricted, or balanced, earth fault protection (REF or BEF). The BEF terminology is
usually used when the protection is applied to a delta winding.
When applying differential protection such as REF, some technique must be
employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, ensuring
that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding/connections.
Two methods are commonly used; bias or high impedance. The biasing technique
operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay
sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit
is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur
under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current
through the relay.
The REF protection in the P341 should be applied as a high impedance differential
element.
Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as
the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 45 of 87
A single DDB signal is available to indicate that the REF protection has tripped,
DDB208. The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the
Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
All of the REF settings can be found at the bottom of the SEF/REF Protn column
and are shown below, in addition to the SEF setting options:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROTN
Sens E/F Options
SEF
IREF> Is
SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF
0.2 x In A
0.05 x In A
1 x In A
0.01 x In A
Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in Section 6

2.14.1

The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential
scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 13.
Healthy CT
Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm
Zm
R CT2
R CT1
IF
R L3
R L1
VS
R ST
R
R L2
R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

VS = I F (R CT + 2 RL )
Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting)
R ST = VS R R
IS
Where R R = relay burden
Figure 13: High impedance principle
AG
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 46 of 87
If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary

current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT
magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the
maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault
current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the
overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the
relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is
relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this
resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 13.
The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 14:
As can be seen from Figure 14, the high impedance protection uses an external
differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then
connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series.
A
B
C
RSTAB
SEF Input
Figure 14: High impedance REF relay/CT connections
2.14.2
Setting guidelines for high impedance REF

From the Sens E/F Options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable this
protection. The only setting cell then visible is IREF> Is1, which may be
programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be
set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault
level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for
a solidly earthed system.
The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer
ratio, the relay operating current (IREF> Is1), the number of current transformers in
parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current
transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in
three ways:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 47 of 87
i. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve a

specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.
Iop
Ie < 1n x
CT ratio
IREF >Is1
ii. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary
operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
[IREF >Is1] <
Iop
CT ratio
nIe
iii. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay
operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Iop = (CT ratio) x (IREF> Is1 = nIe)

In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting (IREF> Is1) must be selected for the
high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the
stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the
setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay
current setting (IREF> Is1).
RST =
Vs
IREF >Is1
The above equation assumes negligible relay burden.

The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum
declared resistance.
USE OF METROSIL NON-LINEAR RESISTORS
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers
under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current
transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to
withstand 3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that
could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an
internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the
prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current
transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of
maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current
transformer secondary winding resistance , the current transformer lead resistance
to the common point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.
Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf Vk )
Vf = If (RCT + 2RL + RST)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 48 of 87
where Vp = peak voltage developed by the c.t. under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if c.t. saturation did not
occur.
If = maximum internal secondary fault current.

RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance.
RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
RST = relay stabilising resistor.
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils
should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the
purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from
the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs.
Their operating characteristics follow the expression:
where
CI0.25
Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor

(metrosil)
constant of the non-linear resistor (metrosil )
instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor

(metrosil) .
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as
follows;
I(rms) = 0.52
where
Vs(rms)
Vs (rms) x 2
C
rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the

metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(metrosil) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (metrosil), its characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
i. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be
as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA r.m.s. for 1A
current transformers and approximately 100mA r.m.s. for 5A current
transformers.
ii. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should
limit the voltage to 1500V r.m.s. or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher
relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to
1500V r.m.s., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required,
depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 49 of 87
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT

The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the
following restrictions:1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT's are as shown in
the following table:
Relay voltage
setting
Recommended Metrosil type
Single pole relay
Triple pole relay
Up to 125V rms
450
0.25
600A/S1/S256
600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms
900
0.25
600A/S1/S1088
600A/S3/1/S1195
Note:
2.15
Nominal
characteristic
Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets
unless otherwise specified by the customer
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection

On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to
earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced
vectors at 120 to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the
primary system this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced.
This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage
transformer having a broken delta secondary connection. Hence, a relay that
measures residual voltage can be used to offer earth fault protection on such a
system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to
earth that is commonly referred to as neutral voltage displacement or NVD.
Alternatively, if the system is impedance or distribution transformer earthed, the
neutral displacement voltage can be measured directly in the earth path via a
single phase VT.
This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault protection irrespective of
whether the system is connected to earth or not, and irrespective of the form of
earth connection and earth fault current level.
Where embedded generation can be run in parallel with the external distribution
system it is essential that this type of protection is provided at the interconnection
with the external system. This will ensure that if the connection with the main supply
system is lost due to external switching events, some type of reliable earth fault
protection is provided to isolate the generator from an earth fault. Loss of
connection with the external supply system may result in the loss of the earth
connection, where this is provided at a distant transformer, and hence current
based earth fault protection may be unreliable.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 50 of 87
ZS
ZL
A-G
VA
VA
VB
VC
VA
VB
VC
VB
VC
VRES
VA
VB
VC
VB
VRES
VC
VB
VC
Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon Z S / Z L ratio.

VRES =
Z S0
x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0
Figure 15a: Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems
The residual over voltage protection function of the P341 relay consists of two
stages with adjustable time delays.
Two stages are included for the element to account for applications that require
both alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is common in such
a case for the system to have been designed to withstand the associated healthy
phase over voltages for a number of hours following an earth fault. In such
applications, an alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected, which
serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the system. This gives time for
system operators to locate and isolate the fault. The second stage of the protection
can issue a trip signal if the fault condition persists.
A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be used
to measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta connected VT.
Alternatively, the residual voltage may be derived internally from the three phase
to neutral voltage measurements. Where derived measurement is used the 3 phase
to neutral voltage must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 51 of 87
ZS
ZL
A-G
ZE
G
VA - G
VC - G
VB - G
VB - G
VC - G
VA - G
VB - G
VRES
VRES
VA - G
G,F
VC - G
VB - G
VC - G
VRES
VRES =
VA - G
G,F
G,F
VB - G
VB - G
VC - G
VC - G
Z S0 + 3ZE
x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0 + 3ZE
Figure 15b: Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems
These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently
permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary
star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux
and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when residual voltage is required to
be derived from the phase to neutral voltage measurement.
The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the
sensitive directional earth fault protection.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal,
via the PSL (DDB156, DDB157), this can be used to improve grading with
downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip
of each stage of protection, (Starts:- DDB256, DDB257, Trips:- DDB213,
DDB214). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the
Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 52 of 87
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input
Measured
VN>1 Function
DT
VN>1 Voltage Set
Measured, Derived
0.02 x In A
4 x In A
0.01 x In A
5V
1V
50V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20V
4V
200V
5V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
VN>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
VN>1 TMS
0.5
100
0.5
VN>1 tRESET
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
VN>2 Status
DT
VN>2 Voltage Set
VN>2 Time Delay
Disabled or DT
5V
1V
50V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20V
4V
200V
5V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t
K x 40 / (1 M)
Time Multiplier Setting (VN>1 TMS)
Operating Time in Seconds
where;
M =
2.15.1
Measured Residual Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage

(VN>1 Voltage Set)
Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection

Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (inverse time operating characteristic),
DT (definite time operating characteristic) or Disabled, within the VN>1
Function cell. Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/
Disabled in the VN>2 Status cell. The time delay (VN>1 TMS for IDMT
curve; V>1 Time Delay , V>2 Time Delay for definite time) should be selected
in accordance with normal relay co-ordination procedures to ensure correct
discrimination for system faults.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 53 of 87
The Residual Over voltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage
measured at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the
Phase-Neutral voltage inputs as selected by VN Input.
The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of
residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in
turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be
calculated by using the formulae previously given in Figs.15a and 15b. It must
also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage
that is present on the system.
Note that IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD in order
that elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one
another.
It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any
standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for
residual over voltage protection is 5V.
The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or
very high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an
appreciable time under an earth fault condition.
2.16
Under voltage protection

Where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the under
voltage element is used to prevent power being exported to external loads at a
voltage below normal allowable limits. Under voltage protection may also be used
for back-up protection for a machine where it may be difficult to provide adequate
sensitivity with phase current measuring elements.
For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged under voltage
condition could arise for a number of reasons. This could be due to failure of
automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment or excessive load following
disconnection from the main grid supply. Where there is a risk that a machine
could become disconnected from the main grid supply and energise external load
it is essential that under voltage protection is used. The embedded generator must
be prevented from energising external customers with voltage below the statutory
limits imposed on the electricity supply authorities.
A two stage under voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay that can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is
included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited
during periods when the machine is isolated from the external system.
Each stage of under voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant
DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB158, DDB159). DDB signals are also available to
indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB258-265, Trips:DDB215-222). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 54 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
VOLT PROTECTION
UNDERVOLTAGE
Sub Heading
V< Measurt Mode
Phase-Neutral
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V< Operate Mode
Any-phase
Any Phase, Three phase
DT
Disabled, DT, IDMT
V<1 Function
V<1 Voltage Set
80 V
10V
120V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320V
40V
480V
4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V<1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
0.5
100
0.5
V<1 TMS
V<1 Poledead Inh
V<2 Function
V<2 Voltage Set
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
DT
Disabled, DT
80 V
10V
120V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320V
40V
480V
4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V<2 Time Delay
1s
V<1 Poledead Inh
0s
Enabled
100 s
0.01 s
Disabled, Enabled
formula:
t
K / (1 - M)
Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS)
where;
M =
Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.16.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 55 of 87
Setting guidelines for under voltage protection

Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation) ,
DT (for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V<1 Function
cell. Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the V<2 Status cell.
The time delay.(V<1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V<1 Time Delay, V<2 Time
Delay for definite time) should be adjusted accordingly.
The under voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or PhaseNeutral voltage as selected by V< Measurt Mode. Single or three phase
operation can be selected in V<1 Operate Mode. When Any Phase is selected,
the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three
Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are
below the setting.
The under voltage threshold for each stage is set in the V>1 Voltage Set and
V>2 Voltage Set cells.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of
G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority will advise settings for the
element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the
system with voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
For this mode of operation the element must be set to operate from phase to neutral
voltage, which will provide an additional degree of earth fault protection.
The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set V<1
Function to DT. The time delay, V<1 Time Delay, should be set to co-ordinate
with downstream. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent
unwanted operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips.
These may occur during clearance of faults further into the power system or by
starting of local machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of
3s 5s.
As previously stated, local regulations for operating a generator in parallel with the
external electricity supply may dictate the settings used for the under voltage
protection. For example in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to
neutral voltage and trip at 90% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s.
The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual
voltage conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the
machine is being operated with the AVR selected to manual control.
To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the
generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting
V Poledead Inh to Enabled. This will ensure that when a poledead condition is
detected (ie. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as
determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the under voltage element will be
inhibited.
2.17
Over voltage protection

An over voltage condition could arise when a generator is running but not
connected to a power system, or where a generator is providing power to an
islanded power system. Such an over voltage could arise in the event of a fault
with automatic voltage regulating equipment or if the voltage regulator is set for
manual control and an operator error is made. Over voltage protection should be
set to prevent possible damage to generator insulation, prolonged over-fluxing of
the generating plant, or damage to power system loads.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 56 of 87
When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an over

voltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level of
power system capacitive charging current. An over voltage condition might also
be possible following a system separation, where a generator might experience
full-load rejection whilst still being connected to part of the original power system.
The automatic voltage regulating equipment and machine governor should quickly
respond to correct the over voltage condition in these cases. However, over
voltage protection is advisable to cater for a possible failure of the voltage
regulator or for the regulator having been set to manual control.
A two stage over voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation.
Each stage of over voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant
DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB160, DDB161). DDB signals are also available to
indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB266-273, Trips:DDB223-230). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP
VOLT PROTECTION
OVERVOLTAGE
Sub Heading
V> Measurt Mode
Phase-Neutral
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral,
V> Operate Mode
Any-phase
Any Phase, Three phase
DT
Disabled, DT, IDMT
V>1 Function
V>1 Voltage Set
150 V
60V
185V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
600V
240V
740V
4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
V>1 TMS
0.5
100
0.5
V>2 Status
DT
V>2 Voltage Set
V>2 Time Delay
Disabled, DT
130 V
60V
185V
1V
Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
520V
240V
740V
4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 57 of 87
formula:
t
K / (M - 1)
where;
K =
Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS)
M =
2.17.1
Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V>1 Voltage Set)
Setting guidelines for over voltage protection

Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT
(for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V>1 Function cell.
Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the
V>2 Status cell. The time delay.(V>1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V>1 Time Delay,
V>2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be selected accordingly.
The over voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or PhaseNeutral voltage as selected by V> Measurt Mode cell. Single or three phase
operation can be selected in V> Operate Mode cell. When Any Phase is
selected the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when
Three Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are
above the setting.
Generators can typically withstand a 5% over voltage condition continuously.
The withstand times for higher over voltages should be declared by the generator
manufacturer.
To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the
phase-phase voltages, to achieve this V>1 Measurt Mode can be set to PhasePhase with V>1 Operating Mode set to Three-Phase. The over voltage
threshold, V>1 Voltage Set, should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal
phase-phase voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, V>1 Time Delay, should
be set to prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed over voltage protection function
due to transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; eg.
following load rejection where correct AVR/Governor control occurs. The typical
delay to be applied would be 1s 3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower
voltage threshold settings.
The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage
protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, V>2 Voltage Set, would
be 130 150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending
on plant manufacturers advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay, V>2
Time Delay, should be set to 0s.
G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
system with voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
For example in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to neutral
voltage and trip at 110% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s.
If phase to neutral operation is selected, the element may operate during earth
faults, where the phase-neutral voltage can rise significantly.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.18
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 58 of 87
Under frequency protection

Under frequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system load
exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of
generators. Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes
split, with load left connected to a set of islanded generators that is in excess of
their capacity. Automatic load shedding could compensate for such events. In this
case, under frequency operation would be a transient condition. This characteristic
makes under frequency protection a simple form of Loss of Mains protection on
system where it is expected that the islanded load attached to the machine when
the grid connection fails exceeds the generator capacity. In the event of the load
shedding being unsuccessful, the generators should be provided with backup
under frequency protection. Where the P341 relay is being used as
interconnection protection the under frequency element is also used to prevent
power being exported to external loads at a frequency below normal allowable
limits.
Four independent definite time-delayed stages of under frequency protection are
offered. Two additional over frequency stages can also be reconfigured as under
frequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic. As well
as being able to initiate generator tripping, the under frequency protection can
also be arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where appropriate.
Energising the relevant DDB signal, via the PSL (DDB162-DDB165), can block each
stage of underfrequency protection. DDB signals are also available to indicate start
and trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:- DDB231-234). The state of
the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of
the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 59 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
FREQ PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY
F<1 Status
Enabled
F<1 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
F<1 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F<2 Status
Enabled
F>2 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01s
F<2 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F<3 Status
Enabled
F>3 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
F<3 Time Delay
2.18.1
Sub Heading
Disabled, Enabled
F<4 Status
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
F<4 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
F<4 Time Delay
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
F< Function Link
1111
Bit 0 - Enable Block F<1 during Poledead

Setting guidelines for under frequency protection

Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or
Disabled, within the F<x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting,
F<x Setting, and time delays, F<x Time Delay, for each stage should be
selected accordingly.
The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for the
generating set or system are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency
condition should be continuously sustainable by the machine however system
considerations may mean that settings much closer to the nominal frequency are
specified.
For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under
common control/ownership, the P341 under frequency protection function could
be used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/load
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 60 of 87
shedding can be provided. The final stage of under frequency protection should
be used to trip the generator.
Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the under frequency
protection should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will
not occur in the event of successful load shedding following a system overload.
Two stages of under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure
16, to co-ordinate with multi-stage system load-shedding.
Frequency
fn
A
F1<
B
C
F2<
Turbine prohibited area
t2
t1
System frequency response with

minimum load shed for recovery
System frequency response with

under shedding of load
Optimum underfrequency
protection characteristic
Time
Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load

shedding.
To prevent operation of any under frequency stage during normal shutdown of the
generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for each
stage by setting the relevant bit in F< Function Link. For example if F< Function
Link is set to 0111,Stage 1, 2 and 3 of under frequency protection will be
blocked when the generator CB is open. Selective blocking of the frequency
protection stages in this way will allow a single stage of protection to be enabled
during synchronisation or offline running to prevent unsynchronised over fluxing of
the machine. When the machine is synchronised, and the CB closed, all stages of
frequency protection will be enabled providing a multi stage load shed scheme if
desired.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 61 of 87
G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority. For example, in the UK the under frequency protection should be set to
47Hz with a trip time of less than 0.5s.
2.19
Over frequency protection function

Over frequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input to
the alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The most
common occurrence of over frequency is after substantial loss of load. When a rise
in running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to reduce the
mechanical input power, so that normal running speed is quickly regained.
Over frequency protection may be required as a backup protection function to
cater for governor or throttle control failure following loss of load or during
unsynchronised or islanded running.
Moderate over frequency operation of a generator is not as potentially threatening
to the generator and other electrical plant as under frequency running. Action can
be taken at the generating plant to correct the situation without necessarily shutting
down the generator. However, where the P341 relay is being used as
interconnection protection the under frequency element will prevent power being
exported to external loads at a frequency higher than normal allowable limits.
Two independent time-delayed stages of over frequency protection are provided.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via
the PSL, (DDB166, DDB167). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and
trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:- DDB231-234). The state of the
DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the
COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
FREQ PROTECTION
OVER FREQUENCY
Sub Heading
F>1 Status
Enabled
F>1 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
F>1 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Status
Enabled
F>2 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
F>2 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.19.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 62 of 87
Setting guidelines for over frequency protection

Each stage of over frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled,
within the F>x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F>x Setting, and time
delays, F>x Time Delay, for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The P341 over frequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal,
transient over frequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator
manufacturer should declare the expected transient over frequency behaviour,
which should comply with international governor response standards. A typical
over frequency setting would be 10% above nominal.
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of
G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority. For example in the UK over frequency protection should be set to 50.5Hz
with a trip time of less than 0.5s.
2.20
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)

Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate
and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit.
Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent
damage/further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmssion
systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore
common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the
circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not
been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation,
breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate.
CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the
fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts,
ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
2.20.1
Breaker failure protection configurations

The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, "CB Fail 1 Timer"
and "CB Fail 2 Timer", allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
Simple CBF, where only "CB Fail 1 Timer" is enabled. For any protection trip,
the "CB Fail 1 Timer" is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker
opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, "CB Fail 1 Timer"
times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the
programmable scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream
switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, "CB Fail 1 Timer" is
used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker.
This requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping.
Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued
following an additional time delay. The backtrip uses "CB Fail 2 Timer", which
is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements "CB Fail 1 Timer" and "CB Fail 2 Timer" can be configured to
operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an
external protection trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay optoisolated inputs to "External Trip" using the programmable scheme logic.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.20.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 63 of 87
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers

It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to
indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as
required. This covers the following situations:
Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied
upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed.
This may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional
arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit
fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the
element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened
fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation
of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles
have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may
not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications.
For example:
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/
overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage
transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit
would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating
protection element might be a more reliable method.
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/
overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage
transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded.
Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from
the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such
cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best
reset method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay's
pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed
provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are
summarized in the following table.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 64 of 87
Initiation (Menu selectable)
CB fail timer reset mechnaism
Current based protection
The resetting mechanism is fixed

(eg. 50/51/46/21/87..)
[IA< operates] &
[IB< operates] &
[IC< operates] &
[IN< operates]
Sensitive earth fault element
The resetting mechanism is fixed.

[ISEF< operates]
Non-current based protection

(eg. 27/59/81/32L..)
Three options are available. The user can

select from the following options.
[All I< and IN< elements operate]
[Protection element reset] AND [All I< and
IN< elements operate]
CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
External protection
Three options are available.

The user can select any or all of the options.
[All I< and IN< elements operate]
[External trip reset] AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 65 of 87
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:

Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
NEG SEQ O/C

GROUP 1
BREAKER FAIL
{Sub-Heading}
CB Fail 1 Status
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 1 Timer
0.2s
CB Fail 2 Status
Disabled
CB Fail 2 Timer
0.4s
Volt Prot Reset
CB Open & I<
I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
Ext Prot Reset
CB Open & I<
I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
0s
10s
0.01s
Enabled, Disabled
0s
UNDERCURRENT
10s
0.01s
{Sub-Heading}
I< Current Set
0.1In
0.02In
3.2In
0.01In
IN< Current Set
0.1In
0.02In
3.2In
0.01In
ISEF< Current
0.02In
0.001In
0.8In
0.0005In
BLOCKED O/C
{Sub-Heading}
CBF Blocks I>
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
CBF Blocks IN>
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
The "CBF Blocks I>" and "CBF Blocks IN>" settings are used to remove starts
issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail
time out. The start is removed when the cell is set to Enabled.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.21
Typical settings
2.21.1
Breaker fail timer settings
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 66 of 87
Typical timer settings to use are as follows:

CB fail reset mechanism
tBF time delay
Typical delay for

2 cycle circuit
breaker
Initiating element reset
CB interrupting time +
element reset time (max.)
+ error in tBF timer + safety margin
50 + 50 + 10 + 50
= 160 ms
CB open
CB auxiliary contacts
opening/closing time
(max.) + error in tBF timer
+ safety margin
50 + 10 + 50
= 110 ms
Undercurrent elements
CB interrupting time +
undercurrent element
(max.) + safety margin
operating time
50 + 25 + 50
= 125 ms
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements.
Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting
should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2 cycle circuit breaker.
Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15ms must be
added to allow for trip relay operation.
2.21.2
Breaker fail undercurrent settings

The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure
that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting
for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator
circuit breaker CBF.
The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standard earth fault undercurrent
elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows:
ISEF<=
IN< =
(ISEF> trip) / 2
(IN> trip) / 2
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 3.
3.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 67 of 87
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS
Blocked overcurrent protection

Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from downstream
relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows identical current
and time settings to be employed on each of the relays involved in the scheme, as
the relay nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and hence trips
discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore reduces the amount of required
grading stages and consequently fault clearance times.
The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast
acting overcurrent elements on the P341 which are then arranged to be blocked
by start contacts from the relays protecting the outgoing feeders. The fast acting
element is thus allowed to trip for a fault condition on the busbar but is stable for
external feeder faults by means of the blocking signal. This type of scheme
therefore provides much reduced fault clearance times for busbar faults than would
be the case with conventional time graded overcurrent protection. The availability
of multiple overcurrent and earth fault stages means that back-up time graded
overcurrent protection is also provided. This is shown in Figures 17a and 17b.
Generator
P341
Block highset element

CB fail backtrip
P140
O/P
from
start
contact
Feeder 1
P140
P140
P140
CB
fail
backtrip
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
Figure 17a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
Feeder 4
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 68 of 87
10.0
Time
(secs)
1.0
P341 IDMT element
IDMT margin
Feeder IDMT element
P341 high set element
0.1
0.08
Feeder start contact
Time to block
0.01
1.0
10.0
100.0
Current (kA)
Figure 17b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
The P140/P341 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the
overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start
signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly.
Each stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the relevant
opto-isolated input.
Note that the P341 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the optoinputs. Hence, in the unlikely event of the faulure of this supply, blocking of that
relay would not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervized and if a
failure is detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme logic, to
provide an output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to signal an alarm
within the substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic could be arranged to
block any of the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would operate nondiscriminatively due to the blocking signal failure.
For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to ALSTOM
T&D Protection & Control Ltd.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 4.
4.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 69 of 87
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Voltage transformer supervision (VTS)

The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer
faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually
results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input
there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as
measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and
automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would
otherwise be compromized. A time-delayed alarm output is also available.
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply.
These are defined below:
1. Loss of one or two phase voltages
2. Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
3. Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence
(nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives
operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is
assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of nps current. The use of
negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or
V connected VTs are used.
Negative Sequence VTS Element:
The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V (or 40V on a
380/440V rated relay), and I2 = 0.05 to 0.5In settable (defaulted to 0.05In).
4.1.1
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions

Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative
phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under
such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is
detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals
(which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In
practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are
changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by
comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle
previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current
should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal
will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS.
The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V (40V on 380/
440V relays) and pickup at 30V (120V on 380/440V relays).
The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1In.
4.1.2
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation

If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect
operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element
detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no
corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a
change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example).
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 70 of 87
An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line

energisation.
The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be as a
result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up
three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the voltage
dependent function and the second would require tripping. To differentiate
between these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS I> Inhibit) is used
which will prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates. This element should
be set in excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line
charging current, transformer inrush current if applicable) but below the level of
current produced by a close up 3 phase fault. If the line is now closed where a 3
phase VT failure is present the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS
block will be applied. Closing onto a three phase fault will result in operation of
the overcurrent detector and prevent a VTS block being applied.
This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the
relays pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions ie.
where no voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will not
be picked up.
4.1.3
Menu settings
The VTS settings are found in the SUPERVISION column of the relay menu.
The relevant settings are detailed below.
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
SUPERVISION
VTS Status
Blocking
Blocking, Indication
VTS Reset Mode
Manual
Manual, Auto
VTS Time Delay
5s
1s
10s
0.1s
VTS I> Inhibit
10In
0.08In
32In
0.01In
VTS I2> Inhibit
0.05In
0.05In
0.5In
0.01In
The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:

VTS set to provide alarm indication only.
Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements.
Optional conversion of directional overcurrent elements to non-directional
protection (available when set to Blocking mode only). These settings are found
in the Function Links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
The VTS I> Inhibit or VTS I2> Inhibit elements are used to override a VTS block in
the event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic.
Once the VTS block has been established, however, it would be undesirable for
subsequent system faults to override the block. The VTS block will therefore be
latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 71 of 87
Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. The first is
manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) provided the
VTS condition has been removed and secondly, when in Auto mode, by the
restoration of the 3 phase voltages above the phase level detector settings
mentioned previously.
A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the case
where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate,
depending on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS
indication will be given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is
given.
Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer
ac output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three
phase output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic
to operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for
compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated
input assigned to MCB Open on the relay will therefore provide the necessary
block.
Where directional overcurrent elements are converted to non-directional protection
on VTS operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting of these
elements is higher than full load current.
4.2
Current transformer supervision

The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more
of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit
of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current
operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks
dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated.
4.2.1
The CT supervision feature

The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived zero sequence current,
in the absence of corresponding derived zero sequence voltage that would
normally accompany it.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer zero sequence
voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be
enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprizes three single phase
units, and has the primary star point earthed.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and
event record (plus DDB 115: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB
290: CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating
from derived quantities (Broken Conductor, Earth Fault2, Neg Seq O/C) are
always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element; other protections can
be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB 290: CTS Block
with the protection function logic.
The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including
the available setting ranges and factory defaults:-
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 72 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
CT Supervision
CTS Status
4.2.2
Sub Heading
Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
N/A
CTS VN< Inhibit
0.5/2V
For
110/440V
respectively
22/88V
For
110/440V
respectively
0.5/2V
For
110/440V
respectively
CTS IN> Set
0.08 x In
4 x In
0.01 x In
CTS Time Delay
0s
10s
1s
Setting the CT supervision element

The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting,
"CTS In> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system
conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the maximum
steady state residual voltage. The "CTS In> set" will typically be set below
minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is generally set
to 5 seconds.
Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the
element can be disabled to prevent protection elements being blocked during fault
conditions.
4.3

An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the
switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or
closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations.
The relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the
position of the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.
4.3.1
Circuit breaker state monitoring features

MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed
(52b) auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these
contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would
indicate one of the following conditions:
Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective
Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions
would apply:
Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective
Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 73 of 87
A normally open/normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function

via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted
operation during normal switching duties.
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called CB Status
Input. This cell can be set at one of the following four options:
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect
any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, autoreclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B
signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will
be available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is
also true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status
information will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible,
according to the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay optoisolated inputs via the PSL.
Auxiliary contact position
4.4
CB state detected
Action
52A
52B
Open
Closed
Breaker open
Circuit breaker healthy
Closed
Open
Breaker closed
Circuit breaker healthy
Closed
Closed
CB failure
Alarm raised if the

condition persists for
greater than 5s
Open
Open
State unknown
Alarm raised if the

condition persists for
greater than 5s

The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:
Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu
Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs
Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications
It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote
circuit breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to
be selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 18. Where this
feature is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection
and remote tripping.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 74 of 87
+ ve
Protection
trip
Trip
0
Close
Remote
control
trip
Remote
control
close
Local
Remote
Trip
Close
ve
Figure 18: Remote control of circuit breaker
The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings
and commands associated with circuit breaker control. Depending on the relay
model some of the cells may not be visible:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Menu text
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 75 of 87
Default setting
Setting range
Min
Step size
Max
CB CONTROL
CB control by
Disabled
Disabled, Local, Remote, Local+Remote,

Opto, Opto+Local, Opto+Remote,
Opto+Rem+Local
Close Pulse Time
0.5s
0.01s
10s
0.01s
Trip Pulse Time
0.5s
0.01s
5s
0.01s
Man Close Delay
10s
0.01s
600s
0.01s
Healthy Window
5s
0.01s
9999s
0.01s
C/S Window
5s
0.01s
9999s
0.01s
Lockout Reset
No
No, Yes
Reset Lockout By
CB Close
User Interface, CB Close
Man Close RstDly
5s
CB Status Input
None
0.01s
600s
0.01s
None, 52A, 52B, Both 52A and 52B
A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed.
Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open.
To confirm these states it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A and/or 52B
contacts (the different selection options are given from the CB Status Input cell
above). If no CB auxiliary contacts are available then this cell should be set to
None. Under these circumstances no CB control (manual or auto) will be possible.
Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate
following a user defined time delay (Man Close Delay). This would give
personnel time to move away from the circuit breaker following the close
command. This time delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands.
The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the Trip Pulse Time and
Close Pulse Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure
the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
Note that the manual close commands are found in the SYSTEM
DATA column of the menu.
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is
generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
Where the check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervize
manual circuit breaker close commands. A circuit breaker close output will only be
issued if the check synchronism criteria are satisfied. A user settable time delay is
included (C/S Window) for manual closure with check synchronising. If the
checksynch criteria are not satisfied in this time period following a close command
the relay will lockout and alarm.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 76 of 87
In addition to a synchronism check before manual reclosure there is also a CB

Healthy check if required. This facility accepts an input to one of the relays optoisolators to indicate that the breaker is capable of closing (circuit breaker energy
for example). A user settable time delay is included "Healthy Window" for manual
closure with this check. If the CB does not indicate a healthy condition in this time
period following a close command then the relay will lockout and alarm.
Where auto-reclose is used it may be desirable to block its operation when
performing a manual close. In general, the majority of faults following a manual
closure will be permanent faults and it will be undesirable to auto-reclose.
The "Man Close RstDly" timer setting is the time for which auto-reclose will be
disabled following a manual closure of the breaker.
If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the
state of CB Status inputs) a "CB Failed to Trip" or "CB Failed to Close" alarm will
be generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can
be viewed on the relay LCD display, remotely via the relay communications, or can
be assigned to operate output contacts for annunciation using the relays
programmable scheme logic (PSL).
Note that the "Healthy Window" timer and "C/S Window" timer set under this
menu section are applicable to manual circuit breaker operations only. These
settings are duplicated in the Auto-reclose menu for Auto-reclose applications.
The "Lockout Reset" and "Reset Lockout by" setting cells in the menu are applicable
to CB Lockouts associated with manual circuit breaker closure, CB Condition
monitoring (Number of circuit breaker operations, for example) and auto-reclose
lockouts.
4.5
Event & fault records

The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile
(battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the
sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power
system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted,
the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a
resolution of 1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or
remotely, via the communications ports.
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled "VIEW
RECORDS". This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records
and is shown the following table:-
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 77 of 87
VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference
Description
Select Event
Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required

event record from the possible 250 that may be stored.
A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on.
Time & Date
Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal
Real Time Clock
Event Text
Up to 32 Character description of the Event refer to

following sections)
Event Value
Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the

Event (refer to following sections)
Select Fault
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault

record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value
of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection
starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc.
associated with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.
Select Report
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required

maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be
stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and
so on.
Report Text
Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence

(refer to following sections)
Report Type
These cells are numbers representative of the

occurrence. They form a specific error code which
should be quoted in any related correspondence to
Report Data
Reset Indication
Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED

indications provided that the relevant protection element
has reset.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to Chapter 5, where
the procedure is fully explained.
Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in
Appendix A.
4.5.1
Types of event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm
condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that
constitute an event:-
4.5.1.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs.

If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that
the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event
is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as
shown below;
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 78 of 87
Time & date of event

LOGIC INPUTS
Event Value
0101010101010101
The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc.
The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
4.5.1.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts.
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time
that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event.
When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will
become visible as shown below;
Time & date of event
OUTPUT CONTACTS
Event Value
010101010101010101010
The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc.
The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
4.5.1.3 Relay alarm conditions.
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual
events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and
how they appear in the event list:Alarm condition
Resulting event
Event Text
Event Value
Battery Fail
Battery Fail ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
Field Voltage Fail
Field V Fail ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
Setting Group via

Opto invalid
Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
Protection Disabled
Protn Disabled ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
Frequency out of range
Freq out of Range ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
VTS Alarm
VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
CB Trip Fail Protection
CB Fail ON/OFF
Number from 0 to 31
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is
appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and output events
previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM
S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on the
LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the
particular condition has become operated or has reset.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 79 of 87
4.5.1.4 Protection element starts and trips

Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be
logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated
element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event
extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore
invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD.
4.5.1.5 General events
A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is
shown below:Nature of event
Displayed text in event

record
Level 1 password modified,

either from user interface,
front or rear port
PW1 edited UI, F or R
Displayed value
0
A complete list of the General Events is given in Appendix A.

4.5.1.6 Fault records.
Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply
states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the "Select Fault" cell
further down the "VIEW RECORDS" column, which is selectable from up to 5
records. These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements etc.
Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate
than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged
some time after the actual fault record is generated.
4.5.1.7 Maintenance reports
Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure,
field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance
Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the "Select Report" cell at
the bottom of the "VIEW RECORDS" column.
Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell,
which are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in
further detail in Appendix 1.
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event
simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
4.5.1.8 Setting changes
Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are
shown in the following table:Type of setting change
Displayed text in event
Displayed value
record
Control/Support Setting
C & S Changed
Group 1 Change
Group 1 Changed
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Note:
4.5.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 80 of 87
Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT ratio

settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting groups.
When any of these settings are changed, the event record is created
simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance recorder
settings will only generate an event once the settings have been confirmed
at the setting trap.
Resetting of event/fault records

If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be
done from within the "RECORD CONTROL" column.
4.5.3
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software

When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly
different than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how
various events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23
Event Type: Protection operation
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Fault record
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Logic input changed state
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Relay output changed state
As can be seen , the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event,
whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the
+/ symbol.
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
Appendix A.
4.6
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for
record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the
selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a
minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. Disturbance records
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 81 of 87
continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the
oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one.
The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per
cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of eight analog data channels and thirty-two
digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analog
channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The "DISTURBANCE RECORDER" menu column is shown in the following table:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
1.5s
0.1s
10.5s
0.01s
Trigger Position
33.3%
100%
0.1%
Trigger Mode
Single
Single or Extended
Analog Channel 1
VAN
VAN, VBN, VCN, VCHECKSYNC,

IA, IB, IC, IN, IN SEF
Analog Channel 2
VBN
As above
Analog Channel 3
VCN
As above
Analog Channel 4
VN
As above
Analog Channel 5
IA
As above
Analog Channel 6
IB
As above
Analog Channel 7
IC
As above
Analog Channel 8
IN SEF
As above
Digital Inputs 1 to 32
Relays 1 to 7/14
and
Optos 1 to 8/16
Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts or

Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or
Internal Digital Signals
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
No Trigger
except Dedicated
Trip Relay O/Ps
which are set to
Trigger L/H
No Trigger, Trigger L/H,

Trigger H/L
DISTURB RECORDER
Duration
Note:
The available analog and digital signals will differ between relay types and
models and so the individual courier database in Chapter 5 should be referred to
when determining default settings etc.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 82 of 87
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the "Duration"
and "Trigger Position" cells. "Duration" sets the overall recording time and the
"Trigger Position" sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration.
For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s
with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault
recording times.
If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will
ignore the trigger if the "Trigger Mode" has been set to "Single". However, if this
has been set to "Extended", the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby
extending the recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analog channels is selectable from the
available analog inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any
of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal
relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these
signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a
setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger
the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the
"Input Trigger" cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output
contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully
explained in Chapter 5.
4.7
Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power
system quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis
and are summarised below:
Phase Voltages and Currents
Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents
Sequence Voltages and Currents
Power and Energy Quantities
Rms. Voltages and Currents
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values
4.7 1
Measured voltages and currents

The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current
values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by
the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle
measurement.
4.7.2
Sequence voltages and currents

Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values;
these are displayed as magnitude values.
4.7.3
Power and energy quantities

Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent, real
and reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase basis
together with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual phase
values. The signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be controlled
using the measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in the table
below:
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Measurement
mode
0 (Default)
Table 1:
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 83 of 87
Parameter
Signing
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging VArs
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging VArs
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging VArs
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging VArs
Leading VArs
Measurement mode
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor
on a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor.
These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy
measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total
exported and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to
maximum values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to
zero, it is also possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces
using the Reset Demand cell.
4.7.4
Rms. voltages and currents

Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of
the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data.
4.7.5
Demand values
The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset
Demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or
the remote communications.
4.7.5.1 Fixed demand values

The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified
interval; values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real and
reactive power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the
previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand period.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 84 of 87
4.7.5.2 Rolling demand values

The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the difference
being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window consists of a
number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window is the subperiod length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of each of the
sub-periods.
4.7.5.3 Peak demand values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and
reactive power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured
quantity since the last reset of the demand values.
4.7.6
Settings
The following settings under the heading Measurement setup can be used to
configure the relay measurement function.
Measurement setup
Default value
Options/Limits
Default Display
Description
Description/Plant Reference/
Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N
Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date
and time
Local Values
Primary
Primary/Secondary
Remote Values
Primary
Primary/Secondary
Measurement Ref
VA
VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC
Measurement Mode
0 to 3 Step 1
Fix Dem Period
30 minutes
1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Roll Sub Period
30 minutes
1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Num Sub Periods
1 to 15 step 1
4.7.6.1 Default display

This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note
that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level
using the and keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the
default display will revert to that selected by this setting.
4.7.6.2 Local values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and
the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
4.7.6.3 Remote values
This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are
displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
4.7.6.4 Measurement ref
Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay
can be selected.
4.7.6.5 Measurement mode
This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities;
the signing convention used is defined in Table 1 (Section 4.7.3)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 85 of 87
4.7.6.6 Fixed demand period

This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window.
4.7.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation
of rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this window.
Section 5.
CT/VT REQUIREMENTS
The CT requirements for P341 are as shown below.

The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault
current of 50 times the relay rated current (In) and the relay having an
instantaneous setting of 25 times rated current (In). The current transformer
requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection elements.
Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above,
or the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT requirements
may need to be increased according to the formulae in the following sections.
Nominal
rating
Nominal
output
Accuracy
class
Accuracy
limited
factor
Limiting
lead
resistance
1A
2.5VA
10P
20
1.3 ohms
5A
7.5VA
10P
20
0.11 ohms
Seperate requirements for Restricted Earth Fault are given in Section 5.6 and 5.7
5.1
Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault

protection
5.1.1

VK
5.1.2
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.2
Non-Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.2.1

VK
5.2.2
Isp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.3
Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault

protection
5.3.1

VK
5.3.2
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 86 of 87
5.4
Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.4.1

VK
5.4.2
Ifp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.5
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth

fault (SEF) protection
5.5.1
Time delayed SEF protection

VK
5.5.2
Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Directional instantaneous SEF protection

VK
5.5.4
Non-directional SEF protection

VK
5.5.3
SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT

Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and
should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formulae given below:
Time delayed element:
VK
Instantaneous element:
VK
Note that, in addition, it should be ensured that the phase error of the applied core
balance current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and
less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current.
Abbreviations used in the previous formulae are explained below:where
VK
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Ifn
Ifp
Icn
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps),
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps),
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times

I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps),
Icp
Isn
Isp
Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps),
Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps),
RCT
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms),
Rrp
Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms),
Rrn
Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms).
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times
I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps),
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
5.6
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 2
Page 87 of 87

The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for
through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the
following equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the
associated stabilising resistor:
Rs
[0.5 * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS1
VK
4 * Is * Rs
VK
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Rs
Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms),
If
Maximum through fault current level (amps).
VK
CT knee point voltage (volts),
IS1
Current setting of REF element (amps),
RCT
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms).
where
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Chapter 3
Relay Description
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Contents
Page 1 of 1
1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.6
HARDWARE MODULES
Processor board
Internal communication buses
Input module
Transformer board
Input board
Power supply module (including output relays)
Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)
Output relay board
IRIG-B Board
Mechanical Layout
3
3
3
4
4
4
6
6
7
7
7
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
RELAY SOFTWARE
Real-time operating system
System services software
Platform software
Record logging
Settings database
Database interface
Protection & Control software
Overview protection & control scheduling
Signal processing
Programmable scheme logic
Event, fault & maintenance recording
8
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
11
12
12
4.
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

Start-up self-testing
System boot
Initialisation software
Platform software initialisation & monitoring
Continuous self-testing
13
13
13
13
14
14
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 1.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 1 of 14
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up
of an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range.
Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the users
requirements.
The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
Processor board which performs all calculations for the relay and controls the
operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also
contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and
communication interfaces).
Input module which converts the information contained in the analogue and
digital input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor
board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board
to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue
to digital conversion and digital inputs.
Power supply module which provides a power supply to all of the other modules
in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also
provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port.
On a second board the power supply module contains the relays which provide
the output contacts.
IRIG-B board which can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide
an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to
specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC 60870
communication only. This board is optional.
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the
processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as
required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from
the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the
flow of information between them.
The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time
operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the
protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the
user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between
the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
The real-time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different
parts of the relays software to operate within. To this end the software is split
into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the
processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and
in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the
exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages.
The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay
hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the
relays software from the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and
provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via
the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an
interface layer between the control of the relays hardware and the rest of the
relay software.
Figure 1:
4 voltage inputs
Up to 9 current inputs
Low
pass
filter
Low
pass
filter
Diffn
to
single
Diffn
to
single
VT
CT
Up
to
9
Low
pass
filter
Diffn
to
single
CT
Transformer board
Up
to
9
Input board
Up
to
9
VT
Low
pass
filter
Anti-alias filters
Diffn
to
single
Buffer
Noise
filter
Optical
isolator
16-bit
ADC
Sample
control
Calibration
E2 PROM
Serial
Interface
8 digital inputs
Noise
filter
Optical
isolator
Parallel bus
Trigger from processor

board
Serial sample
data bus
Buffer
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 2 of 14
Parallel bus
16:1
Multiplexer
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 3 of 14
The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user
interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records.
All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides
direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (ie. the
front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC 60870-5-103) the
platform software converts the information from the database into the format
required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all
settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control
software.
The protection & control software performs the calculations for all of the
protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as
Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the disturbance recorder.
The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for
settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software
for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital optoisolated inputs.
Section 2.
HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a
separate function within the relays operation. This section describes the functional
operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1
Processor board
The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs
all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the
data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD,
keypad and LEDs.
The processor board is located directly behind the relays front panel which allows
the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel
communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial
communications (eg. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the
25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial
communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications
controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM
which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data
storage as required during the processors calculations. The non-volatile memory is
sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of
software code and text, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of
disturbance, event and fault record data, and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the
storage of configuration data, including the present setting values.
2.2
Internal communication buses

The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different
modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable.
The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control
signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main
processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the
relay are slaves.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 4 of 14
The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the
digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP
processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the
serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
2.3
Input module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and
the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module can
consist of either two or three PCBs; the two standard boards are the main input
board and a transformer board. Depending on the relay model, more than five
current inputs can be provided by supplementing these two boards with an
auxiliary transformer board which can provide up to four further current inputs.
2.3.1
Transformer board
The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up
to five current transformers (CTs). The auxiliary transformer board adds up to four
more CTs. The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu
and wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either 110V or
440V nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both to step-down
the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relays electronic circuitry and
to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system.
The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer
secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce
noise.
2.3.2
Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the
analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and
VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the
samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board
the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being
multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A D converter
provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output.
The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be
sampled. This allows for up to 9 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs to be
accommodated. The 3 spare channels are used to sample 3 different reference
voltages for the purpose of continually checking the operation of the multiplexer
and the accuracy of the A-D converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24
samples per cycle of the power waveform by a logic control circuit which which is
driven by the frequency tracking function on the main processor board.
The calibration E2PROM holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the
processor board to correct for any amplitude or phase error introduced by the
transformers and analogue circuitry.
The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on
the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input
board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input
signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as
the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relays electronics from
the power system environment. A 48V field voltage supply is provided at the
back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs.
Figure 2:
Supervisor task
Sample data & digital

logic inputs
Sampling function
copies samples into
2 cycle buffer
Fourier signal
processing
Programmable &
fixed scheme logic
Disturbance
recorder task
Protection
algorithms
Protection & Control Software
Relay hardware
Front panel interface

LCD & keypad
Settings database
Local & remote

communications
interface Courier
Remote communications
interface
Modbus
Remote communications
interface
IEC 60870-5-103
Platform Software
Event, fault, disturbance,
maintenance
record logging
Control of interfaces to keypad,

LCD, LEDs, front and rear comms ports.
Self-checking maintenance records
Protection & control settings
Control of output contacts and

programmable LEDs
Protection task
Measurements and event, fault

& disturbance records
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 5 of 14
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 6 of 14
The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove
unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus.
Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted
by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which
contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board,
but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on
the main input board.
2.4
Power supply module (including output relays)

The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself
and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input
and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485
communication interface.
2.4.1
Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)

One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the
relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the
supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in
table 1 below.
Nominal dc range
Nominal ac range
24/54V
dc only
48/125V
30/100V rms
110/250V
100/240V rms
Table 1:
Power supply options
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide
isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay.
Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits,
16V for the analogue electronics, eg. on the input board, and 22V for driving the
output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are
distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level
is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is
brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the
optically isolated digital inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485
interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide
communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC 60870-5-103
protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides
optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal
communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output
relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and
one normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are
provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.4.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 7 of 14
Output relay board

The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and
four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply
line. The relays state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus.
Depending on the relay model, more than seven output contacts may be provided,
through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Each additional relay board
provides a further seven output relays.
2.5
IRIG-B Board
The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide a timing
reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available.
The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of
the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time
clock and for various other processes, for example time-tagging of event, fault and
disturbance records. The IRIG-B board is used to provide a reading of the present
time and date. The time reading is accurate to better than 1ms.
The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver
which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical
connection (IEC 60870 only).
2.6
Mechanical Layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a
conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all
joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in
the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing
strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit
noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring
clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital
logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear
communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal.
9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data
communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the
board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD
and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 3.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 8 of 14
RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this
chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:
the real-time operating system
the system services software
the platform software
the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the
protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour
of the relay. Figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
3.1
Real-time operating system

The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule
the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available
and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in
part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use
of operating system messages.
3.2

As shown in Figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between
the relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and
the protection & control software. For example, the system services software
provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote
communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of
the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
3.3
Platform software
The platform software has three main functions:
to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection
software, including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance
records.
to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile
memory.
to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the
relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear
communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been
specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103).
3.3.1
Record logging
The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance
records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up
SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay
maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault
records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest
record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated
from the protection software or the platform software.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Present values
of all
settings
Alarm, event, fault &

maintenance
records
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 9 of 14
CPU code & data,

setting database
data
Battery
backed-up
SRAM
E2 PROM
Front LCD panel
RS232 Front comms port
Flash
EPROM
SRAM
Parallel test port

LEDs
Default settings &

parameters, language text,
software code
CPU
Main processor board

Timing data
IRIG-B board
optional
IRIG-B signal
Fibre optic
rear comms port
optional
Serial data bus

(sample data)
Parallel data bus
ADC
Relay board
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages),

rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Power supply board
Power
supply
Figure 3:
Digital inputs (x8)
Digital input values
Opto-isolated inputs
Output relays
Output relay contacts (x7)
Power supply, rear comms

data, output relay status
Watchdog
contacts
Field
voltage
Transformer board
Rear RS485
communication port
Current & voltage inputs (up to 13)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.3.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 10 of 14
Settings database
The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including
the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings groups.
The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform
softwares management of the settings database includes the responsibility of
ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any
one time. This feature is employed to avoid confusion between different parts of the
software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and
disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a scratchpad in
SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be made in any order
but applied to the protection elements, and saved in the database in E2PROM, at
the same time (see also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects
the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3
Database interface
The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal
interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces.
The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the
relays user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software
presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
3.4
Protection & Control software

The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the
protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has
to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software
as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest
priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest
possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor
task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of
messages between the task and the platform software.
3.4.1
Overview - protection & control scheduling

After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there
are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is
controlled by a sampling function which is called by the system services software
and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a twocycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number
of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P341
generator loss of mains protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per
cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power
cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again
when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations
by other software tasks to take place.
3.4.2
Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the optoisolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are
checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a
change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a
cycle before it is registered with the protection & control software.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive
Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by
detecting a change in the measured signals phase angle. The calculated value of
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 11 of 14
the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so
as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power
waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection &
control task.
When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it
calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier
components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from
the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way
extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and
produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular
component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental
frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise.
This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which
provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half
sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per
cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in
memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms.
The samples from the input module are also used in an unprocessed form by the
disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of
current, voltage and power for metering purposes.
3.4.3
Programmable scheme logic

The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to
configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application.
This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from
the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, eg.
protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic.
The fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL
itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be
programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any
number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay,
and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on
the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL
are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any
of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input
signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL
logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed.
This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection
& control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the
PSL input signals every time it runs.
This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design.
However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system,
and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support
package MiCOM S1.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.4.4
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 12 of 14
Event, fault & maintenance recording

A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to
indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection &
control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is
available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which
is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an
event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the
appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging
to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that
the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the
platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to
be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost
if the supervisors buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new
log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate
this loss of information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task
instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance
record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be
triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to
successfully store a maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem.
See also the section on self supervision & diagnostics later in this chapter.
3.4.5
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control
task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of
up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of
10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection &
control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it
receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the
demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed
format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input
signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state
condition. The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM
S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of
other packages to view the recorded data.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 4.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 13 of 14
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS
The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of

its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an
error or fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to
detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot.
This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is
indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the
watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem,
then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be
indicated by the LED and watchdog contact.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store
a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the
problem to be notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic
check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, eg. at power-on, and
secondly a continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the
relays critical functions whilst it is in service.
4.1
Start-up self-testing
The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to
complete, during which time the relays protection is unavailable. This is signalled
by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay
has passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem,
the relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
4.1.1
System boot
The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the
program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution
by the processor. When this has been completed the data then held in SRAM is
compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that
no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM.
The entry point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay
initialisation code.
4.1.2
Initialisation software
The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor
registers and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to
determine whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating
system and creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the
initialisation process the relay checks:
the status of the battery.
the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and
disturbance records.
the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the optoisolated inputs.
the operation of the LCD controller.
the watchdog operation.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 3
Page 14 of 14
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the
process of starting the platform software.
4.1.3
Platform software initialisation & monitoring

In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in
E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B
board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data; the
presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analogue
data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage.
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and
the protection started-up.
4.2
Continuous self-testing
When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts
of its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services
software (see section on relay software earlier in this chapter) and the results
reported to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows:
the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by
a checksum.
the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding
data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption.
the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified
with a checksum.
the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum.
the battery status.
the level of the field voltage.
the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the
relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is
executed. The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously
checked by the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of
sampling the reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel.
the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software
that reads the time and date from the board.
If any of the checks detects an error within the relays subsystems, the platform
software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance record in battery
backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status or the IRIG-B board, the
relay will continue in operation. However, for problems detected in any other area
the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5
seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay
including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur.
As described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough
diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to
restart, ie. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself
permanently out of service. This is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the
relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Chapter 4
Technical Data
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Contents
Page 1 of 2
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
RATINGS
Currents
Voltages
Auxiliary voltage
Frequency
Logic inputs
Output relay contacts
Field voltage
Loop through connections
Wiring requirements
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
BURDENS
Current circuit
Voltage circuit
Auxiliary supply
Optically-isolated inputs
3
3
3
3
3
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
ACCURACY
Reference conditions
Measurement accuracy
Protection accuracy
Influencing quantities
High voltage withstand IEC 60255-5:1977
Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5:1997 rear terminals only
Impulse
Insulation resistance
4
4
4
5
7
7
7
7
8
4.
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.1.13
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
Electrical environment
DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979
AC ripple on dc supply IEC 60255-11:1979
Disturbances on ac supply EN61000-4-11: 1994
High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988
Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 & IEC 60801-4:1988
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1996
Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991
Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991
Radiated immunity C37.90.2:1995
Conducted immunity EN50141:1993
Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5:1995
EMC compliance
Power frequency interference Electricity Association (UK)
Atmospheric environment
Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989
Pollution degree IEC 61010-1 1990
Mechanical environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Contents
Page 2 of 2
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS

ANSI/IEEE C37.90 : 1989
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995
10
10
10
10
6.
6.1
SAFETY
Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive
11
11
7.
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

Four stage non-directional/directional overcurrent (50/51)
Threshold settings
Time delay settings
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic
Definite time characteristic
Reset characteristics
Four stage directional earth fault (50N/51N)
Threshold settings
Restricted earth fault (low impedance)
SBEF and SEF time delay characteristics
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)
Setting ranges
Time delay settings
Earth fault protection of Petersen Coil earthed systems
Under voltage (27)
Level settings
Under voltage protection time delay characteristics
Over voltage (59)
Level settings
Over voltage protection time delay characteristics
Under frequency (81U)
Over frequency (81O)
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)
Voltage transformer supervision
Nominal frequency
Breaker fail timers (tBF1 and tBF2)
11
11
11
11
11
12
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
17
18
19
19
19
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4
CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS

Circuit breaker condition monitoring
Maintenance alarm settings
Lock-out alarm settings
Reconnection time delay
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
9.
9.1
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES

CT and VT ratio settings
21
21
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 1.
1.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 1 of 21
RATINGS
Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms (dual rated).

Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral
input of each winding sharing one terminal.
1.2
CT type
Operating range
Standard
0 to 64In
Sensitive
0 to 2In
Duration
Withstand
Continuous rating
4In
10 seconds
30In
1 second
100In
Voltages
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300V dc or 300V rms.
Nominal voltage
Short term above Vn
100 120Vph - ph rms
0 to 200Vph - ph rms
380 480Vph - ph rms
0 to 800Vph - ph rms
Duration
1.3
Withstand
(Vn = 100/120V)
Withstand
(Vn = 380/480V)
Continuous (2Vn)
240Vph - ph rms
880Vph - ph rms
10 seconds (2.6Vn)
312Vph - ph rms
1144Vph - ph rms
Auxiliary voltage
The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the
table below:
Nominal ranges
Operative dc
range
Operative ac
range
19 to 65V
48 110V dc (30 100V ac rms) **
37 to 150V
24 to 110V
110 250V dc
(100 240V ac rms)**
87 to 300V
80 to 265V
24 48V dc
** rated for ac or dc operation.

1.4
Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 60Hz, the operate range is
40Hz 70Hz.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
1.5
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 2 of 21
Logic inputs
All the logic inputs are independent and isolated, relay type P341 provides 8
inputs.
Rating
Range
Logical off
0V dc
0 to 12V dc
Logical on
50V dc
30 to 60V dc
Higher voltages can be used in conjunction with an external resistor, value of the
resistor is determined by the following equation:
Resistor = (Required input level 50) x 200.
1.6
Output relay contacts

Make & carry
30A for 3s
Carry
250A for 30ms

5A continuous
Break
dc:
dc:
ac:
ac:
Maxima:
5A and 300V
Loaded contact:
10,000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact:
100,000 operations minimum
50W resistive
25W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
1250VA resistive
1250VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
Watchdog contact
Break
dc: 30W resistive

dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 375W indictive (P.F. = 0.7)
The maximum number of output relays that should be configured to be permanently

energized is 50% of those available (minimum 4)
1.7
Field voltage
The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of
112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V.
1.8
Loop through connections

Terminals D17 D18 and F17 F18 are internally connected together for
convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V
1.9
Wiring requirements
The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in
the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2, Chapter 2)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 2.
2.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 3 of 21
BURDENS
Current circuit
CT burden (at nominal current)
2.2
1A
<0.1
5A
<0.02
Voltage circuit
Reference voltage (Vn)
2.3
Vn = 100 120V
<0.02VA rms at 110V
Vn = 380 480V
<0.1VA rms at 440V
Auxiliary supply
Case size
Nominal*
Maximum**
Size 8
15W
20W
Nominal is with 50% of the optos energised and one relay per card
energised
** Maximum is with all optos and all relays energised

2.4
Optically-isolated inputs
DC supply 5mA burden per input. (Current drawn at mimimum voltage)
2.5mA at minimum voltage (30V)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 3.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 4 of 21
ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is 2.5% unless otherwise specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy
shall be valid over the full setting range.
3.1
Quantity
Test tolerance
Ambient temperature
20C
2C
Atmospheric pressure
86kPa to 106kPa
45 to 75%
Current
In
5%
Voltage
Vn
5%
50 or 60Hz
0.5%
dc 48V or 110V
ac 63.5V or 110V
5%
General
Relative humidity
Input energising quantity
Frequency
Auxiliary supply
Settings
3.2
Reference value
Time multiplier setting
1.0
Time dial
10
Phase angle
Measurement accuracy
Quantity
Range
Accuracy
Current
1.0In
1%
Voltage
1.0 Vn
1%
40 to 70Hz
0.025Hz
0 to 360
Frequency
Phase
3.3
0.08 1.0 In

Current threshold (I2p>)
Undervoltage elements (V<)

Vn = 100/120V
Vn = 380/440V
10 120V
40 440V
0.2 to 1.2 In
0.5 25V
2.0 100V

Voltage threshold (V2p>)
Vn = 100/120V
Vn = 380/440V
Undercurrent elements (I<, I0<)
0.5 25V
2.0 100V
2 to 20 Is [2]
2 to 20 Is [1]
95 to +95
2 to 20 Is [1]
Range
Zero sequence voltage polarisation (Vop>)

Vn = 100/120V
Vn = 380/440V
Sensitive earth fault measuring

elements (ISEF>)
Earth fault measuring elements (IN>, IREF>)
Relay characteristic angle
Phase overcurrent elements (I> & I>>)
Element
Protection accuracy
1
0.95 Is 5%
0.95 Is 5%
Accuracy: 2%
DT: Is 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Is 5%
DT: Is 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Is 5%
DT: Is 5%
IDMT: 0.95 Vs 5%
Accuracy: 10%
Accuracy: 5%
Accuracy: 5%
1.05 Vs5%
5%
0.95 Is 5%
0.95 Is 5%
DT: Is 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Is 5%
Accuracy:
10% at RCA 90
Reset
Trigger
Greater of 2% or 50ms
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
Above setting: 10ms or less

Below seting: 15ms or less
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
Time Accuracy
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 5 of 21
0 to 10s
Breaker fail timers
[2] 0r 2 In, whichever is the smaller
[1] or 65 In, whichever is the smaller
2 to 20 Is [1]
2 to 20 Is [1]
Relay overshoot
Transient overreach
0 360
Voltage vector shift
Directional operating boundary
Rate of change of frequency
1 50V
4 200V
Reverse power (P>), over power (P>)
Residual overvoltage elements

Vn = 100/120V
Vn = 380/440V
60 185V
360 680V
Range
Under/over frequency
Overvoltage elements (V> & V>>)

Vn = 100/120V
Vn = 380/440V
Element
<5% (for a system

X/R of up to 90)
Accuracy: 2
<50ms
0.95 Vs 5%
DT: Vs 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Vs 5%
0.5
0.95 5%
5%
To be determined
0.95 Vs 10%
Reset
<0.025 Hz
DT: Is 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Vs 5%
Trigger
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
IDMT: 5% or 40ms
Time Accuracy
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 6 of 21
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.4
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 7 of 21
Influencing quantities
No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities:
Quantity
Operative range (typical only)
Environmental
Temperature
25C to +55C
Mechanical (Vibration, Shock,

Bump, Seismic)
According to
IEC 60255-21-1:1988
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-3:1995
Quantity
Operative range
Electrical
Frequency
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Harmonics (single)
5% over the range 2nd to 17th
Auxiliary voltage range
0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac)
Aux. supply ripple
12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn
Point on wave of fault waveform
0 to 360
DC offset of fault waveform
No offset to fully offset
Phase angle
90 to + 90
Magnetising inrush
No operation with OC elements set to 35%

of peak anticipated inrush level.
3.5
High voltage withstand IEC 60255-5:1977
3.5.1
Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5:1997 rear terminals only

2.0kV rms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.
2.0kV rms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit
grouped together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and
loop through connections D17/D18 and F17/F18.
1.5kV rms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output
relays.
1.0kV rms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and
watchdog output relays.
3.5.2
Impulse
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s,
0.5J across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent
circuit connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected
together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.5.3
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 8 of 21
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance is greater than 100M at 500V dc.
Section 4.
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
The product complies with the following specifications :

4.1
Electrical environment
4.1.1
DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979

The product will withstand a 20ms interruption in the auxiliary voltage in its
quiescent condition without de-energization.
4.1.2
AC ripple on dc supply IEC 60255-11:1979

The product will operate with 12% ac ripple on the dc auxiliary supply without any
additional measurement errors.
4.1.3
Disturbances on ac supply EN61000-4-11: 1994

The products satisfies the requirements of EN61000-4-11 for voltage dips and
short interruptions of 20ms.
4.1.4
High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988

The product complies with Class III 2.5kV common mode and 1kV differential
mode for 2 seconds at 1MHz with 200 source impedance, without any maloperations or additional measurement errors.
4.1.5
Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 & IEC 60801-4:1988

The product complies with all classes up to and including class IV/4kV without any
mal-operations or additional measurement errors.
4.1.6
Fast transient disturbances on power

supply (common mode only)
4kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time,

5kHz repetition time, 15ms burst,
repeated every 300ms for 1min in
each polarity, with a 50 source
impedance.
Fast transient disturbances on I/O

signal, data and control lines
(common mode only)
2kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time,

5kHz repetition time, 15ms burst,
repeated every 300ms for 1min in
each polarity, with a 50 source
impedance.
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1996

The product will withstand application of all discharge levels up to the following
without mal-operation:
Class IV
15kV discharge in air to the user interface, display and exposed

metal work.
Class III
8kV discharge in air to all communication ports.
Level 3
6kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the

product without any mal-operations.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
4.1.7
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 9 of 21
Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991

Group 1 Class A limits.
0.15 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average).
0.5 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average).
4.1.8
Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991

Group 1 Class A limits.
30 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
230 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
4.1.9
Radiated immunity C37.90.2:1995

25MHz to 1000MHz, zero and 100% square wave modulated. Field strength of
35V/m.
4.1.10
Conducted immunity EN50141:1993

Class III
4.1.11
10Vrms @ 1kHz 80% am. 0.15 to 80MHz.
Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5:1995

Class IV
4.1.12
4kV peak, 1.2/50s between all groups and case earth

2kV peak, 1.2/5.0s between terminals of each group
EMC compliance
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC is
claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
Generic Standards EN 50081-2 :1994 and EN 50082-2 :1995 are used to
establish conformity.
4.1.13
Power frequency interference - Electricity Association (UK)

EA PAP Document, Environmental Test Requirements for Protection Relays and
Systems Issue I, Draft 4.2.1 1995.
Class
Length of comms
circuit
Unbalanced
comms
V rms
Balanced
comms
(Unbalance
1%) V rms
Balanced
comms
(Unbalance
0.1%) V rms
1 to 10 metres
0.5
0.005
0.0005
10 to 100 metres
0.05
0.005
100 to 1000 metres
50
0.5
0.05
1000 to 10,000m or >
500
0.5
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
4.2
Atmospheric environment
4.2.1
Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 10 of 21
Storage and transit 25C to +70C.

Operating 25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-1:1990 Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974 Dry heat
4.2.2
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969

56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40C.
4.2.3
Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989

IP52 Protected against dust and dripping water at 15 to the vertical.
4.2.4
Pollution degree IEC 61010-1 1990

Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, a tempory
conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
4.3
Mechanical environment
4.3.1
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988

Vibration Response Class 2 1g
Vibration Endurance Class 2 2g.
4.3.2
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988

Shock response Class 2 10g
Shock withstand Class 1 15g
Bump Class 1 10g
4.3.3
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993

Class 2.
Section 5.
ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS
The products shall meet the ANSI/IEEE requirements as follows :5.1
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 : 1989

Standards for relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus.
5.2
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989

Surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems:Oscillatory test 1MHz to 1.5MHz, 2.5kV to 3.0kV,
Fast transient test 4kV to 5kV
5.3
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995

Standard for withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic
interference from transceivers. 35V/m, 25 to 1000Mhz.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 6.
6.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 11 of 21
SAFETY
Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive

The product shall be compliant with the low voltage (safety/insulation) directive
EN61010-1:1993.
Products are reviewed for compliance to the LV Directive.
Section 7.
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
7.1
Four stage non-directional/directional overcurrent (50/51)
7.1.1
Threshold settings
Setting
Stage
Range
Step size
I>1 current set

I>2 current set
I>3 current set
I>4 current set
1st stage
0.08 to 4.0In
0.01In
2nd stage
0.08 to 4.0In
0.01In
3rd stage
0.08 to 32In
0.01In
4th stage
0.08 to 32In
0.01In
Directional settings:
7.1.2
Setting
Range
Step size
I> Char angle
95 to +95
Time delay settings

Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay can
be blocked by an optically isolated input:
7.1.3
Element
Time delay type
1st stage
Definite Time (DT) or IDMT
2nd stage
DT or IDMT
3rd stage
DT
4th stage
DT
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic

IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US
curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=Tx
(I/Is )
+L
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=
TD
7
K
(I/Is)
+L
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
where t
K
=
=
I =
IS =
=
L =
T =
TD =
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 12 of 21
operation time
constant
measured current
current threshold setting
constant
ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT characteristics
Standard
K
constant
constant
L
constant
Standard inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
Very inverse
IEC
13.5
Extremely inverse
IEC
80
Long time inverse
UK
120
Moderately inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Very inverse
IEEE
19.61
0.491
Extremely inverse
IEEE
28.2
0.1217
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
0.18
Short time inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
IDMT curve
description
Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves

Setting
TMS
Range
Step size
0.025 to 1.2
0.025
Time dial settings for IEC/US curves

Name
TD
7.1.4
Range
Step size
0.5 to 15
0.1
Range
Step size
0 to 100s
10ms
Definite time characteristic

Element
All stages
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.1.5
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 13 of 21
Reset characteristics
Reset options for IDMT stages:
Curve type
Reset time delay
IEC UK curves
DT only
All other
IDMT or DT
The inverse reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT
curve as shown in the table below. Thus if IDMT reset is selected the curve selection
and time dial setting will apply to both operate and reset.
All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:
t
Reset
TD
7
tr
1 (I/Is)
where tReset = reset time

tr
= constant
I
IS
= measured current
= constant
TD
= Time Dial setting (Same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)
= current threshold setting
Inverse reset characteristics

Standard
tr
constant
constant
Moderately inverse
IEEE
4.85
Very inverse
IEEE
21.6
Extremely inverse
IEEE
29.1
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
Short time inverse
US-C02
2.261
IEEE/US IDMT
curve description
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 14 of 21
7.2
Four stage directional earth fault (50N/51N)
7.2.1
Threshold settings
Type
Stage
Range
Step sze
Stand by earth fault
1st Stage
0.08 4.0 In
0.01 In
2nd Stage
0.08 4.0 In
0.01 In
3rd Stage
0.08 10 In
0.01 In
(0.01In to In)
0.1 In
(In to 10 In)
4th Stage
0.08 10 In
0.01 In
(0.01In to In)
0.1 In
(In to 10 In)
1st Stage
0.005 0.1 In
0.00025 In
2nd Stage
0.005 0.1 In
0.00025 In
3rd Stage
0.005 0.8 In
0.00025 In
4th Stage
0.005 0.8 In
0.00025 In
Sensitive earth fault
7.2.2
7.2.3
Restricted earth fault (low impedance)

Setting
Range
Step size
K1
0% to 20%
1 % (minimum)
K2
0% to 150%
1 % (minimum)
Is1
Is2
0.05In to In
0.01In
0.1In to 1.5In
0.1In
SBEF and SEF time delay characteristics

The earth-fault measuring elements for SBEF and SEF shall be followed by an
independently selectable time delay. These time delays have an extended range of
0 to 200s, but are otherwise identical to those of the phase overcurrent definite
time delay. The reset time delay is the same as the phase overcurrent reset time.
7.3
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)
7.3.1
Setting ranges
Name
Range
Step size
(Vn 100/120V)
1 50V
1V
VN>> (Vn 100/120V)
1 50V
1V
VN>
(Vn 380/440V)
4 200V
4V
VN>> (Vn 380/440V)
4 200V
4V
VN>
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.3.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 15 of 21
Time delay settings

The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t=
where,
K
M 1
Time multiplier setting
operating time in seconds
Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
Definite time and TMS setting ranges.
7.4
Range
Step size
TMS setting (K)
0.5 100s
0.5
DT reset setting
0 100s
0.01s
Earth fault protection of Petersen Coil earthed systems

Name
Range
Step size
PN>
0 20W
(Rating = 1A, 100/120V)
0.05W
0 100W (Rating = 5A, 100/120V)
0.25W
0 80W
0.20W
7.5
Under voltage (27)
7.5.1
Level settings
Name
(Rating = 1A, 380/440V)
Range
Step size
10 120V
1V
40 480V
4V
10 120V
1V
40 480V
4V
Vph N<1 & Vph - ph<1

(Vn = 100/120V)
(Vn = 380/440V)
(Vn = 100/120V)
(Vn = 380/440V)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.5.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 16 of 21
Under voltage protection time delay characteristics

Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable
time delay.
The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or
Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay
setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation
of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t=
where,
K
1 M
= Time multiplier setting
= Operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Definite time and TMS setting ranges.
Range
Step size
DT setting
0 100s
0.1s
TMS setting (K)
0.5 100
0.5
Timer accuracy should be <2% (or 50ms whichever is greater).

7.6
Over voltage (59)
7.6.1
Level settings
Name
Range
Step size
60 185V
1V
240 740V
4V
60 185V
1V
240 740V
4V
Vph N>1 & Vph - ph>1

(Vn = 100/120V)
(Vn = 380/440V)
(Vn = 100/120V)
(Vn = 380/440V)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.6.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 17 of 21
Over voltage protection time delay characteristics

Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable
time delay.
The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time
or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time
delay setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation
of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula :
t=
where,
K
M 1
= Time multiplier setting
= Operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Definite time and TMS setting ranges
Range
7.7
DT setting
0 100s
0.1s
TMS setting (K)
0.5 100
0.5
Under frequency (81U)

Range
7.8
Step size
Step size
f (for all stages)
45 65 Hz
0.01 Hz
t (for all stages)
0 100s
0.01s
Over frequency (81O)

Range
Step size
f (for all stages)
45 65 Hz
0.01 Hz
t (for all stages)
0 100s
0.01s
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.9
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 18 of 21
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Settings
Range
Stage 1
Enable/disable
Mode
Reverse/low forward/over
-P> (reverse power)
14W 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V)
2W
56W 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V)
8W
70W 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V)
10W
280W 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V)
40W
P< (low forward

power)
P> (over power)
Step size
14W 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V)
2W
56W 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V)
8W
70W 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V)
10W
280W 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V)
40W
14W 300W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V)
2W
56W 1200W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V)
8W
70W 1500W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V)
10W
280W 6000W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V)
40W
DT
0 100s
0.1s
DO timer
0 10s
0.1s
VTS block
Enable/disable
Stage 2
Same as Stage 1
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
7.10
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 19 of 21
Voltage transformer supervision

Name
Range
Voltage threshold (V2)
10V (100/120V
Step size
Fixed
40V (380/440V)
Phase overvoltage
P.U. 30V, D.O. 10V
Fixed
(100/120V) P.U.120V,
D.O.40V (380/440V)
Phase overcurrent
0.08In to 32In (Model 1)

0.08In to 10In (Models 2&3)
7.11
7.12
0.01In
Superimposed current
0.1In
Fixed
Current threshold (I2)
0.1In
Fixed
Timer
1.0 10s
0.1s
Nominal frequency
Setting
Range
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz
Step size
10 Hz
Breaker fail timers (tBF1 and tBF2)

These timers can be enabled or disabled via a setting.
Timer
Setting range
Step size
tBF1
0 to 10s
0.01s
tBF2
0 to 10s
0.01s
The timers are reset by:

undercurrent elements operating, or
initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or
circuit breaker open auxiliary contact (if current operation/external device
is not applicable)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 8.
8.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 20 of 21
CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS

Circuit breaker state monitoring shall be based on the monitoring of discrepancy
between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s, then
the trip circuit alarm shall be indicated.
8.2

Name
Range
Trip pulse time
0.1 to 5s
0.01s
Close pulse time
0.1 to 10s
0.01s
Delay time before close
0.1 to 600s
0.01s
8.3
Circuit breaker condition monitoring
8.3.1
Maintenance alarm settings
8.3.2
Name
Range
Operation threshold
1 10000
Ix threshold
1000 2.5 x 1012
t threshold
5 500ms
Step size
1
1000
1ms
Lock-out alarm settings

Name
Range
Operation threshold
1 10000
Ix
threshold
t threshold
8.4
Step size
1000 2.5 x
Step size
1
1012
1000
5 500ms
1ms
Setting
Range
Step
Reconnection timer
0 300s
0.01s
Reset timer
0.01s 30s
0.01s
Reconnection time delay
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 9.
9.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 4
Page 21 of 21
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES
CT and VT ratio settings

Primary range
Secondary range
Current transformer
1 30000 Amps
step size 1A
1 or 5 Amps
Voltage transformer
100V 10000kV
step size 1V
100 440V
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Chapter 5
SCADA Communications
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Contents
Page 1 of 1
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.7
2.8
COURIER INTERFACE
Courier protocol
Front courier port
Supported command set
Relay courier database
Setting changes
Method 1
Relay settings
Setting transfer mode
Event extraction
Automatic event extraction
Event types
Event format
Manual event record extraction
Disturbance record extraction
Programmable logic settings
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
MODBUS INTERFACE
Communication link
Modbus functions
Response codes
Register mapping
Event extraction
Manual selection
Automatic extraction
Record data
Manual selection
Record data
Setting changes
Password protection
Protection and disturbance recorder settings
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE

Physical connection and link layer
Initialisation
Spontaneous events
General interrogation
Cyclic measurements
Commands
Test mode
Disturbance records
Blocking of monitor direction
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Section 1.
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 1 of 14
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail
to allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been
outlined in earlier chapters the relay supports a choice of one of three protocols
via the rear communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface
which supports the Courier protocol.
The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up
to 32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
For each of the three protocol options the supported functions/commands will be
listed together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures
such as extraction of event, fault and disturbance records or setting changes will
also be described.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this chapter do not aim to
fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should
be referred to for this information. This chapter serves to describe the specific
implementation of the protocol on the relay.
Section 2.
2.1
COURIER INTERFACE
Courier protocol
Courier is an ALSTOM Protection and Control communication protocol.
The concept of the protocol is that a standard set of commands are used to access
a database of settings/data within the relay. This allows a generic master to be
able to communicate with different slave devices. The application specific aspects
are contained, i.e. the master station does not need to be pre-configured.
Within the database itself rather than the commands used to interrogate it.
The same protocol can be used via two physical links K-Bus or RS232; K-Bus is
based on RS485 voltage levels and is synchronous, the RS232 interface uses
IEC60870 FT1.2 (IEC60870) frame format. The relay supports an IEC60870
connection on the front, for one to one connection, this is not suitable for
permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate, 11 bit frame and a
fixed device address. The rear RS485 interface is used to provide a permanent
connection for K-Bus and allows multi-drop connection. It should be noted that
although K-Bus is based on RS485 voltage levels it is a synchronous protocol using
FM0 encoding. It is not possible to use a standard RS232 to RS485 converter to
convert IEC60870 to K-Bus.
The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the
Courier protocol, command set and link description.
R6509 K-Bus Interface Guide
R6510 IEC60870 Interface Guide
R6511 Courier Protocol
R6512 Courier User Guide
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.2
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 2 of 14
Front courier port

The front RS232 port supports the Courier protocol for one to one communication.
It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/maintenance and is
not suitable for permanent connection. Since this interface will not be used to link
the relay to a substation communication system some of the features of Courier are
not implemented. These are as follows:
Automatic extraction of Event Records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag
Sent Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented
Automatic extraction of Disturbance records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag
Busy Response Layer:
Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a
request will be the final data
Fixed Address:
The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address
command is not supported.
It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance
records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front
port.
2.3
Supported command set

The following Courier commands are supported by the relay:
Protocol Layer
Reset Remote Link
Poll Status
Poll Buffer*
Low Level Commands
Send Event*
Accept Event*
Send Block
Store Block Identifier
Store Block Footer
Menu Browsing
Get Column Headings
Get Column Text
Get Column Values
Get Strings
Get Text
Get Value
Get Column Setting Limits
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 3 of 14
Setting Changes
Enter Setting Mode
Preload Setting
Abort Setting
Execute Setting
Reset Menu Cell
Set Value
Control Commands
Select Setting Group
Change Device Address*
Set Real Time
Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front Courier port.
2.4
Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as
hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated
settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a
text string to identify the contents of the column.
Appendix A contains the complete database definition for the relay for each cell
location the following information is stated:
Cell Text
Cell Datatype
Cell value
Whether if the cell is settable, if so
Minimum value
Maximum value
Step size
Password Level required to allow setting changes
String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)
2.5
Setting changes
(See Courier User Guide Chapter 9)
Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are
supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the settings
within the relay database.
2.5.1
Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 4 of 14
Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by
this action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
2.5.2
Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response to
this command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the
nature of a failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more rapidly
then the previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the relay.
This method is most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1.
2.5.3
Relay settings
There are three categories of settings within the relay database
Control and Support
Disturbance Recorder
2.5.4
Protection Settings Group

Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented
immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Settings made to either the
Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in
scratchpad memory only and are not immediately implemented by the relay.
To action setting changes made to these areas of the relay database the Save
Changes cell in the Configuration column must be written to. This allows the
changes to either be confirmed and stored within non-volatile memory or the
setting changes to be aborted.
Setting transfer mode
If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within
the Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03)
when set to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made with
the relay set in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and
support settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are
confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory.
2.6
Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either
Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order
using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if
appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events,faults or
maintenance data at random from the stored records.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.6.1
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 5 of 14
Automatic event extraction

(See Chapter X Courier User Guide)
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as
it is produced, it is only supported via the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte,
this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0
or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance
records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted
the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
2.6.2
Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
Change of state of output contact
Change of state of opto input
Protection element operation
Alarm condition
Setting Change
Password entered/timed-out
Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
2.6.3
Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the
relay:
Cell Reference
Timestamp
Cell Text
Cell Value
Appendix B contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how
the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and Maintenance
records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together
with two additional fields:
Event extraction column
Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using
the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a
setting which allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected. This setting
should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended
data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the
column.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.6.4
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 6 of 14
Manual event record extraction

Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault and
maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the
record selected. It is possible to select by event number, or to directly select a fault
record or maintenance record.
Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to 249
to select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most recent
record; 249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records (Type 0) cells 0102
to 0105 contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the
event fields. If the event selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3) then the
remainder of the column will contain the additional information.
Fault Record Selection (Row 05) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault
record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault
records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will
then contain the details of the fault record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) - This cell can be used to select a
maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way
to the fault record selection.
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new
event or fault occurs.
2.7

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed
format via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4, it
should be noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance
records are not supported.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be
assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records.
To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status
byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted
using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file
extracted from the relay is in a compressed format, it will be necessary to use
MiCOM S1 to de-compress this file and save the disturbance record in the
COMTRADE format.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port
does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be
extracted manually from this port.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
2.8
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 7 of 14
Programmable logic settings

The programmable logic settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the
relay using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12 of the Courier User
Guide.
The following cells are used to perform the extraction
B204 Domain: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL
configuration data (Upload only)
B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded/
downloaded.
B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be
downloaded with the relay.
B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process
B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download.
The Programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and
from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM
S1 must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also performs
checks on the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to the relay.
Section 3.
MODBUS INTERFACE
The Modbus interface is a master/slave protocol, it is defined by MODICON Inc

by the following document:
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference GuidePI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
3.1
Communication link
This interface also uses the rear RS485 port for communication using RTU mode
communication rather than ASCII mode as this provides more efficient use of the
communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined in page 7 of
the Modbus Guide.
The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front
panel interface or the front Courier port:
Baud Rate
Device Address
Parity
Inactivity Time
3.2
Modbus functions
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the relay:
01
Read Coil Status
02
Read Input Status
03
Read Holding Registers
04
Read Input Registers
06
Preset Single Register
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 8 of 14
08
Diagnostics
11
Fetch Communication Event Counter
12
Fetch Communication Event Log
16
Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way:
3.3
01
Read status of output contacts (1xxxx addresses)
02
Read status of opto inputs (2xxxx addresses)
03
Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses)
04
Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses
06
Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses)
16
Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
Response codes
Code
Modbus description
MiCOM interpretation
01
Illegal Function Code
The function code transmitted is not

supported by the slave
02
Illegal Data Address
The start data address in the request is not

an allowable value. If any of the cells in
the range to be written to cannot be
accessed due to password protection then
all changes within the request are
discarded and this error response will be
returned. Note: If the start address is
correct but the range includes non implemented addresses this response is
not produced
03
Illegal Value
A value referenced in the data field

transmitted by the master is not within
range. Other values transmitted within the
same packet will be executed if inside
range.
06
Slave Device Busy
The write command cannot be

implemented due to the database being
locked by another interface. This response
is also produced if the relay software is
busy executing a previous request.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.4
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 9 of 14
Register mapping
The relay supports the following memory page references:Memory Page
Interpretation
0xxxx
Read and write access of the Output Relays.
1xxxx
Read only access of the Opto Inputs.
3xxxx
Read only access of Data.
4xxxx
Read and write access of Settings.
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999).

Note that the extended memory file (6xxxx) is not supported.
A complete map of the Modbus addresses supported by the relay is contained in
Appendix 1 of this service manual.
3.5
Event extraction
The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or
manual extraction of the stored event, fault and maintenance records.
3.5.1
Manual selection
There are three registers available to manually select stored records, there are also
three read only registers allowing the number of stored records to be determined.
40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249
40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4
40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4
For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored
record.
The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of
record stored.
30100 - Number of stored records
30101 - Number of stored fault records
30102 - Number of stored maintenance records
Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by
the relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault
or maintenance record details will also become populated.
3.5.2
The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they
occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault or
maintenance data that may be associated with the event.
The Modbus master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that
have not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status register
30001. If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has unextracted events
available. To select the next event for sequential extraction the master station writes
a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400. The event data together with
any fault/maintenance data can be read from the registers specified below. Once
the data has been read the event record can be marked as having been read by
writing a value of 2 to register 40400.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.5.3
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 10 of 14
Record data
The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same
whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms detailed
above.
Event Record Data: 30103 to 30109
The presence of additional data for the event record is indicated by cell 30110, a
value of 0 means that there is no additional data.
30110 = 1, fault record data can be read from 30111 to 30197
30110 = 2, maintenance record data can be read from 30198 to 30199
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual
mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above, the
event record data in cells 30103 to 30109 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401 to clear independently the stored relay event/
fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to reset the
relay indications, this has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear key
within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu.
3.6

The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of
disturbance records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting a
disturbance record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the data
are identical.
3.6.1
Manual selection
Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each stored
record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be used to
determine the identifiers for the stored records
30800 - The number of stored disturbance records
30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record
A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register
40250. It is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this way
produce a list of all the stored records.
3.6.2
The Modbus master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance
records by polling register 30001. When the disturbance bit of this register is set
disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next disturbance
record write a value of 3 to cell 40400. Once the disturbance record data has
been read by the master station this record can be marked as having been read by
writing a value of 4 to register 40400.
3.6.3
Record data
The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be read
from registers 30390 to 30393. The disturbance record data itself is stored in a
compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must be read using
a paging system.
The number of pages required to extract a record will depend on the configured
size of the record.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 11 of 14
When a record is first selected the first page of data will be available in registers
30803 to 30929 (the number of registers required for the current page can be
read from register 30802, this will be 127 for all but the last page in the record).
Once the first page has been read the next page can be selected by writing a
value of 5 to register 40400. If this action is performed on the last page for the
disturbance record an illegal value error response will be returned. This error
response can be used by the Modbus master to indicate that the last page of the
disturbance record has been read.
3.7
Setting changes
The relay settings can be split into two categories:
control and support settings
disturbance record settings and protection setting groups
Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately.
Changes to either the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder are
stored in a temporary area and must be confirmed before they are implemented.
All the relay settings are edited via Modbus using 4xxxx addresses. The following
points should be noted when settings are being edited:
Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multiregister write operation.
The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there are
unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data associated
with these addresses will be discarded.
If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the
illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same
write operation will be executed.
If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require a
higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting
changes in the write operation will be discarded.
3.7.1
Password protection
As described in the introduction to this service manual the relay settings can be
subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to edit a
setting is indicated in relay setting database (Appendix A). Level 2 is the highest
level of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required for
editing.
The following registers are available to control Password protection:
40001&40002
40022
3.7.2
Password Entry
Default Password Level
40023&40024
Setting to Change password level 1
40025&40026
Setting to Change password level 2
30010
Can be read to indicate current access level

Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
3.7.3
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 12 of 14
Protection and disturbance recorder settings

Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will
not be used by the relay unless a confirm or to abort operation is performed.
Register 40405 can be used to either to confirm or abort the setting changes
within the scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports four groups
of protection settings. The Modbus addresses for each of the four groups are
repeated within the following address ranges:
Group 1
41000-42999
Group 2
43000-44999
Group 3
45000-46999
Group 4
47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups the following
functions are provided.
Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings by
writing to register 40402.
It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the
source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407.
It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two
operations defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes must
be confirmed by writing to register 40405.
The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404.
An illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set the active
group to one that has been disabled.
Section 4.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the

slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol.
The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
Initialisation (Reset)
Time Synchronisation
Event Record Extraction
General Interrogation
Cyclic Measurements
General Commands
4.1
Physical connection and link layer

Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear RS485
port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be fitted the
selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or the front
Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the next relay
power up.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 13 of 14
For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay
address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a
change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.
4.2
Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters
have been changed a reset command is required to initialize the communications.
The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset
FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the
relays transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU
or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following
information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name:
ALSTOM
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay
model number to identify the type of relay, eg P141.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up
it will also produce a power up event.
4.3
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the
time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no
reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.
If the relay clock is being synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be
possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to
set the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the current
date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
4.4
Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/
information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not
used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardized messages will
not be sent.
Events are categorized using the following information:
Common Address
Function Type
Information number
Appendix 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.
The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay
produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardized
messages. For example if the relay produces starts and trips for four stages of
overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the standardized messages.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Chapter 5
Page 14 of 14
Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each
stage to be indicated. The table in Appendix 1 shows the common address as an
offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in
order to pass these events.
4.5
General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers,
information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the
GI cycle are indicated in Appendix 1.
4.6
Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can
be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at
which the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using the
Measurement Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu/
front Courier port and is active immediately following a change.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value.
The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in Appendix 1.
4.7
Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in Appendix 1. The relay will
respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT)
of negative acknowledgement of a command.
4.8
Test mode
It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to disable
the relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed.
This is interpreted as test mode by the IEC60870-5-103 standard. An event will be
produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events
and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a
COT of test mode.
4.9
Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the
mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains
compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no
disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.
Any attempt to extract disturbance record data from the relay (using ASDU 24) will
result in the relay responding with ASDU 31 end of transmission of disturbance
record with a Type of Order of abortion by the protection equipment.
4.10

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Appendix A
Courier Database
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 1 of 87
APPENDIX A
This Appendix is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
Menu Datatype Definition
Event Data for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
Internal Digital Signals
Default Programmable Logic
Menu database
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface, the
front panel user interface and the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay
settings and measurements. Datatypes for Modbus and indexed strings for Courier
and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section
(using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are
also defined within this database.
Note:
The following labels are used within the database
Label
Description
Value
V1
Main VT Rating
1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
V2
Checksync VT Rating
1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
V3
NVD VT Rating
1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
I1
I2
I3
I4
Phase CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
Earth Fault CT Raing
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A)
Sensitive CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C)
Mutual CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
Menu datatype definition

This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier
and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard
Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for
all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from
the Menu Database using a G number.
Event data
This section of the Appendix specifies all the event information that can be
produced by the relay. It details exactly how each event will be presented via the
Courier, User and Modbus interfaces.
IEC 60870-5-103 Interoperability guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for
the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the
Communications Chapter of this Manual (Volume 1 Chapter 5).
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 2 of 87
Internal digital signals

This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output
contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal
signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric
index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used
to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data
section of this Appendix).
Default programmable logic
This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of
the relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the
MiCOM S1 Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.
References
Chapter 1 Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay
Chapter 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference GuidePI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
IEC 60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Password
Sys Fn Links
Description
Plant Reference
Model Number
Serial Number
Frequency
Comms Level
Relay Address
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Plant Status
Control Status
Active Group
CB Trip/Close
Software Ref. 1
Opto I/P Status
Relay O/P Status
Alarm Status
Access Level
Password Control
Password Level 1
N/A N/A
00
Language
D2
D1
D0
22
21
20
11
10
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
00
UI
SYSTEM DATA
Menu Text
ASCII Password(4 chars)
Unsigned Integer(16 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String
ASCII Text(16 chars)
Indexed String(2)
ASCII Text(7 chars)
Binary Flag (8 bits)

Indexed Strings
Indexed String
Data type
G20
G22
G1
G55
G3
G3
G3
G3
G95
G20
G19
Strings
40023
40022
30010
30011
30008
30007
30052
40021
30006
30004
30002
30001
40020
30044
30020
40012
40004
40003
40001
Modbus
Start
40024
30012
30009
30059
30051
30035
40019
40011
40002
Address
End
G20
G22
G1
G96
G9
G8
G3
G55
G1
G5
G4
G26
G1
G3
G3
G3
G3
G95
G20
G19
Modbus
Datagroup
AAAA
No Operation
255
50
ALSTOM
MiCOM P34X
AAAA
English
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
65
50
32
32
65
Min
90
255
60
163
163
90
Max
10
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Sets only for interface being used
Modbus Only (Relay Status)
Address of Rear Courier interface

Address available via LCD
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 3 of 87
1/2 visible if Start 1/2
1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
N/A
N/A
N/A
Field Failure
Trip 1 2
NPS Thermal
Alarm Trip
Data
Data
Data
Data
Field Failure
Start 1 2
Additional data present
Allows Fault Record to be selected
N/A
Note DTL depends on event type

See Event sheet of Spreadsheet
See Event sheet
Indicates type of event

See Event sheet
No of event records stored

No of fault records stored
No of maintenance records stored
Max value is the oldest record
Field Failure
Alarm
1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Data
Data
Data
Data
Comment
N/A
Model
P341 P342 P343
Power
Trip 1 2
Password
Level
1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Step
N/A
249
90
Max
Power
Start 1 2
Data
Setting
65
Min
N/A
G1
30110
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Gen Differential
Trip
G1
G27
40101
30109
(From Record)
(From Record)
AAAA
Default Setting
A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
30108
G12
G13
G1
G1
G1
G20
Modbus
Datagroup
N/A
06
30106
40026
Address
End
Tripped Phase
ABCN
01
Select Fault
05
Ascii String (32 chars)
30103
30107
30100
30101
30102
40100
40025
Modbus
Start
A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
01
Record Value
04
IEC870 Time & Date
Cell Reference
G20
Strings
N/A
01
Record Text
03
02
01
00
Data type
Started Phase
ABCN
01
Time & Date
N/A 01
01
Select Event
Menu Cell Ref
01
VIEW RECORDS
D3
Courier
Col Row
00
UI
SPassword Level 2
Menu Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 4 of 87
1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Restricted E/F
Trip IREF>
Residual O/V NVD

Start VN> 1 2
Residual O/V NVD

Trip VN> 1 2
100% Stator EF
Start Trip
V/Hz
Alarm Start Trip
df/dt
Start Trip
V Vector Shift
Trip
Dead Machine
Trip
U/Voltage start
V< 1 2 AB BC CA
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A
Sensitive E/F
Trip ISEF> 1234
1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
Data
N/A
Comment
Sensitive E/F
Start ISEF> 1234
Data
Data
Data
Data
Model
P341 P342 P343
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
Password
Level
N/A
Step
Earth Fault
Trip IN> 1234
Max
1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
Min
N/A
Data
Cell Type
Earth Fault
Start IN> 1234
Default Setting
1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
Modbus
Datagroup
N/A
Address
End
Overcurrent
Trip I> 1234
Modbus
Start
1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
Strings
N/A
Data type
Overcurrent
Start I> 1234
Courier
Col Row
N/A
UI
System Backup
Start Trip
Menu Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 5 of 87
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RTD Alarm
RTD 2 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 3 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 4 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 5 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 6 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 7 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 8 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 9 Label
RTD Alarm
RTD 10 Label
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Visible if Alarm RTD 10
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
RTD Alarm
RTD 1 Label
Data
1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
N/A
Overfrequency
Trip F> 1 2
Comment
1/2 visible if Start F>1/2
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Model
P341 P342 P343
N/A
Password
Level
Overfrequency
Start F> 1 2
Step
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
Max
N/A
Min
Underfrequency
Trip F< 1234
Data
Cell Type
1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
Default Setting
N/A
Modbus
Datagroup
Underfrequency
Start F< 1234
Address
End
N/A
Modbus
Start
O/Voltage Trip
V> 1 2 AB BC CA
Strings
N/A
Data type
O/Voltage Start
V> 1 2 AB BC CA
Courier
Col Row
N/A
UI
U/Voltage Trip
V< 1 2 AB BC CA
Menu Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 6 of 87
0B
Binary Flag (32 Bits)

Indexed String
G86
G85
30118
30116
30119
30117
30115
N/A 01

Indexed String
30114
G86
G85
G107
G84
Trip Elements2
0A
G107
30113
N/A 01

Indexed String
30112
Trip Elements1
09
G84
N/A 01

Indexed String
Start Elements2
08
G16
N/A 01
30111
Start Elements1
G16
Started phases + tripped phases
N/A 01
Faulted Phase
07
VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
N/A
Supervision
VTS CTS
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
N/A
Breaker Fail
CB Fail 1 2
Data
N/A
RTD Trip
RTD 10 Label
Data
Tripped secondary elements
Tripped main elements
Started Elements
Started Elements
Visible if Trip RTD 10
N/A
Data
RTD Trip
RTD 9 Label
N/A
Comment
RTD Trip
RTD 8 Label
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Model
P341 P342 P343
N/A
Password
Level
RTD Trip
RTD 7 Label
Step
N/A
Max
RTD Trip
RTD 6 Label
Min
N/A
Data
Cell Type
RTD Trip
RTD 5 Label
Default Setting
N/A
Modbus
Datagroup
RTD Trip
RTD 4 Label
Address
End
N/A
Modbus
Start
RTD Trip
RTD 3 Label
Strings
N/A
Data type
RTD Trip
RTD 2 Label
Courier
Col Row
N/A
UI
RTD Trip
RTD 1 Label
Menu Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 7 of 87
*
*
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
IB
IB-1
IC
IC-1
VAB
VBC
VCA
VAN
VBN
VCN
IA-2
IB-2
IC-2
IA Differential
IB Differential
IC Differential
VN Measured
VN Derived
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (current)
30165
30163
30161
30159
30157
30155
30153
30151
30149
30147
30145
30143
30141
30139
30137
30135
30133
30166
30164
30162
30160
30158
30156
30154
30152
30150
30148
30146
30144
30142
30140
30138
30136
30134
30132
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G25
G24
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
13
30131
30130
30129
Data
01
Courier Number (time)
30128
G30
IA
IA-1
12
11
30127
Data
Model
P341 P342 P343
01
Password
Level
Relay Trip Time
Step
01
Max
CB Operate Time
10
Courier Number (frequency)
G1
Data
Min
01
(From Record)
Data
Cell Type
Fault Duration
0F
30126
G12
G87
Default Setting
01
Unsigned Integer
30125
30121
Modbus
Datagroup
System Frequency
0E
30122
30120
Address
End
01
IEC870 Time & Date
G87
Modbus
Start
Active Group
0D

Indexed String
Strings
01
0C
Data type
Fault Time
N/A 01
Fault Alarms
Courier
Col Row
UI
Menu Text
Faullt Alarms/Warnings
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 8 of 87
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
RTD 7 Label
RTD 8 Label
RTD 9 Label
RTD 10 Label
df/dt
V Vector Shift
Select Maint
Maint Text
Maint Type
Maint Data
Reset Indication
FF
F3
F2
F1
F0
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
Indexed String
Unsigned integer (32 bits)
Ascii Text (32 chars)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number (Hz/s)
Courier Number (Temperature)
30198
30196
40102
30195
30194
30193
30192
30191
30190
30189
30188
30187
30199
30197
G27
G27
G1
G30
G25
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
Command
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
01
RTD 6 Label
30
30186
30185
G10
Data
01
RTD 5 Label
2F
30184
G30
Data
01
RTD 4 Label
2E
2D
30183
G29
01
RTD 3 Label
No
01
RTD 2 Label
2C
Courier Number (Decimal)
30182
Data
Data
Data
01
RTD 1 Label
2B
30180
G29
G24
G24
Data
01
Courier Number (VAr)
30179
30176
30174
G24
3Ph Power Factor
2A
30177
30175
30173
30172
Data
01
Courier Number (Power)
30171
G24
3 Phase VArs
29
28
27
30170
Model
P341 P342 P343
01
Password
Level
3 Phase Watts
Step
01
Max
I2
Min
01
Data
Cell Type
IREF Bias
26
G11
Default Setting
01
30169
G24
Modbus
Datagroup
IREF Diff
30168
Address
End
25
30167
Modbus
Start
01
Strings
IN Sensitive
Data type
*
24
Courier
Col Row
01
UI
IN Derived
IN Measured
Menu Text
Allows Self Test Report to be selected
Visible if V Vector shift trip
Visible if df/ft trip
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 9 of 87
*
*
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
IC Phase Angle
IC-1 Phase Angle
IN Measured Mag
IN Measured Ang
IN Derived Mag
IN Derived Angle
ISEF Magnitude
ISEF Angle
I1 Magnitude
I2 Magnitude
I0 Magnitude
IA RMS
IB RMS
IC RMS
VAB Magnitude
VAB Phase Angle
VBC Magnitude
VBC Phase Angle
17
16
15
14
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (degrees)
30235
30233
30232
30230
30228
30226
30224
30222
30220
30218
30217
30215
30214
30212
30211
30209
30208
30206
30234
30231
30229
30227
30225
30223
30221
30219
30216
30213
30210
30207
G30
G24
G30
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
05
30204
02
30205
30203
Data
IC Magnitude
IC-1 Magnitude
G30
Model
P341 P342 P343
04
03
30202
Password
Level
02
Step
IB Phase Angle
IB-1 Phase Angle
Max
Min
02
Data
Cell Type
IB Magnitude
IB-1 Magnitude
G24
Default Setting
02
30201
Modbus
Datagroup
02
30200
Address
End
IA Phase Angle
IA-1 Phase Angle
Modbus
Start
01
Strings
02
Data type
IA Magnitude
IA-1 Magnitude
Courier
Col Row
00
UI
MEASUREMENTS 1 02
Menu Text
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 10 of 87
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
VCA Phase Angle
VAN Magnitude
VAN Phase Angle
VBN Magnitude
VBN Phase Angle
VCN Magnitude
VCN Phase Angle
VN Measured Mag
VN Measured Ang
VN Derived Mag
VN Derived Ang
V1 Magnitude
V2 Magnitude
V0 Magnitude
VAN RMS
VBN RMS
VCN RMS
Frequency
MEASUREMENTS 2
A Phase Watts
B Phase Watts
C Phase Watts
A Phase VArs
B Phase VArs
C Phase VArs
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
2D
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
Courier
Col Row
02
UI
VCA Magnitude
Menu Text
Data type
Strings
30315
30312
30309
30306
30303
30300
30265
30263
30261
30259
30257
30255
30253
30252
30251
30250
30248
30247
30245
30244
30242
30241
30239
30238
30236
Modbus
Start
30317
30314
30311
30308
30305
30302
30264
30262
30260
30258
30256
30254
30252
30249
30246
30243
30240
30237
Address
End
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G30
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
Modbus
Datagroup
Default Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 11 of 87
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
C Phase VA
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase VA
3Ph Power Factor
APh Power Factor
BPh Power Factor
CPh Power Factor
3Ph WHours Fwd
3Ph WHours Rev
3Ph VArHours Fwd
3Ph VArHours Rev
3Ph W Fix Demand
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
Fixed Demand
Fixed Demand
Fixed Demand
IA
IB
IC
3 Ph W Roll Dem
3Ph VArs RollDem
IA Roll Demand
IB Roll Demand
IC Roll Demand
3Ph W Peak Dem
3Ph VAr Peak Dem
03
03
B Phase VA
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
Courier
Col Row
03
UI
A Phase VA
Menu Text
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Vars)
Courier Number (VArh)
Courier Number (VArh)
Courier Number (Wh)
Courier Number (Wh)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Data type
Strings
30382
30379
30377
30375
30373
30370
30367
30365
30363
30361
30358
30355
30352
30349
30346
30343
30342
30341
30340
30339
30333
30330
30327
30324
30321
30318
Modbus
Start
30384
30381
30378
30376
30374
30372
30369
30366
30364
30362
30360
30357
30354
30351
30348
30345
30335
30332
30329
30326
30323
30320
Address
End
G29
G29
G24
G24
G24
G29
G29
G24
G24
G24
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G30
G30
G30
G30
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
Modbus
Datagroup
Default Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand
3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand
3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse)
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward)
3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse)
3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward)
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 12 of 87
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
IB Peak Demand
IC Peak Demand
Reset Demand
MEASUREMENTS 3
IA-2 Magnitude
IA-2 Phase Angle
IB-2 Magnitude
IB-2 Phase Angle
IC-2 Magnitude
IC-2 Phase Angle
IA Differential
IB Differential
IC Differential
IA Bias
IB Bias
IC Bias
IREF Diff
IREF Bias
VN 3rd Harmonic
Rotor Thermal
Reset Thermal
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
RTD 4
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
25
24
23
22
Courier
Col Row
03
UI
IA Peak Demand
Menu Text
G11
G11
Strings
Indexed String
Courier Number (Percentage)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Indexed String
Data type
30431
30430
30429
30428
40104
30427
30425
30423
30421
30419
30417
30415
30413
30411
30409
30408
30406
30405
30403
30402
30400
40103
30389
30387
30385
Modbus
Start
30426
30424
30422
30420
30418
30416
30414
30412
30410
30407
30404
30401
30390
30388
30386
Address
End
G10
G10
G10
G10
G11
G1
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G11
G24
G24
G24
Modbus
Datagroup
No
No
Default Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
(090E=1) && (X304 = 1)
(090E=1) && (X304 = 1)
(0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3)
(0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3)
(090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
(090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
(090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 13 of 87
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
RTD 9
RTD 10
RTD Open Cct
RTD Short Cct
RTD data error
Reset RTD flags
CB CONDITION
CB Operations
Total IA Broken
Total IB Broken
Total IC Broken
CB Operate Time
Reset CB Data
CB CONTROL
CB Control by
Close Pulse Time
Trip Pulse Time
Man Close Delay
CB Healthy Time
Lockout Reset
Reset Lockout by
Man Close RstDly
0A
09
08
06
05
03
02
01
00
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
Courier
Col Row
04
UI
RTD 5
Menu Text
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Indexed string
G81
G11
G99
G11
G11
G110
G109
G108
Strings
Data type
40208
40207
40206
40204
40203
40202
40201
40200
40150
30607
30605
30603
30601
30600
40105
30440
30439
30438
30437
30436
30435
30434
30433
30432
Modbus
Start
40205
30606
30604
30602
Address
End
G2
G81
G11
G35
G2
G2
G2
G99
G11
G25
G24
G24
G24
G1
G11
G110
G109
G108
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
G10
Modbus
Datagroup
CB Close
No
10
0.5
0.5
Disabled
No
No
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
Min
600
9999
600
10
Max
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Manual Close Reset Delay
Manual Close Delay
Reset All Values
Circuit Breaker operating time
Broken Current C Phase
Broken Current B Phase
Broken Current A Phase
Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
CB CONDITION MONITORING
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 14 of 87
04
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
IRIG-B Sync
IRIG-B Status
Battery Status
Battery Alarm
CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults
Setting Group
Active Settings
Save Changes
Copy From
Copy To
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Gen Differential
Power
Field Failure
NPS Thermal
System Backup
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
06
05
N/A
Time
12:00
01
N/A
N/A 08
00
Date
12-Jan-98
Date/Time
08
DATE AND TIME
11
Courier
Col Row
07
UI
CB Status Input
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
IEC870 Time & Date
Indexed String
Data type
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G98
G90
G62
G90
G61
G53
G37
G59
G17
G37
Strings
40416
40415
40414
40413
40412
40411
40410
40409
40408
40407
40406
40405
40404
40403
40402
40305
30091
30090
40304
40300
40209
Modbus
Start
40303
Address
End
G37
G37
G37
G37
G98
G90
G62
G90
G61
G53
G37
G59
G17
G37
G12
G118
Modbus
Datagroup
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbaled
Disabled
Enabled
No Operation
Group 1
No Operation
Menu
No Operation
Enabled
Disabled
None
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Setting
Command
Setting
Setting
Command
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Front Panel Menu only
Front Panel Menu only
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 15 of 87
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
Earth Fault
SEF/REF Protn
Residual O/V NVD
100% Stator EF
V/Hz
df/dt
V Vector Shift
Dead Machine
Reconnect Delay
Volt Protection
Freq Protection
RTD Inputs
CB Fail
Supervision
Input Labels
Output Labels
RTD Labels
CT & VT Ratios
Recorder Control
Disturb Recorder
Measuret Setup
Comms Settings
Commission Tests
Setting Values
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
13
10
Courier
Col Row
09
UI
Overcurrent
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G54
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
Strings
40400
40401
40431
40430
40429
40428
40427
40426
40425
40424
40423
40422
40421
40420
40419
40418
40417
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G18
G6
Modbus
Datagroup
Primary
Visible
Visible
Invisible
Invisible
Invisible
Visible
Visible
Visible
Visible
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Model
P341 P342 P343
Record selection command register

Record control command register
Residual Overvoltage
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 16 of 87
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0B
0B
0B
0B
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Main VT Primary
Main VT Secy
NVD VT Primary
NVD VT Secondary
Phase CT Primary
Phase CT Secy
E/F CT Primary
E/F CT Secondary
SEF CT Primary
SEF CT Secondary
RECORD CONTROL
Clear Events
Clear Faults
Clear Maint
DISTURB RECORDER
Duration
Trigger Position
Trigger Mode
Analog Channel 1
04
03
02
01
00
03
02
01
00
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
0A
UI
CT AND VT RATIOS
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (%)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G31
G34
G11
G11
G11
Strings
40603
40602
40601
40600
40514
40513
40512
40511
40510
40509
40508
40506
40502
40500
Modbus
Start
40507
40501
Address
End
G31
G34
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G35
G2
G35
Modbus
Datagroup
VAN
Single
33.3
1.5
No
No
No
110
110
110
110
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Command
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0.1
80*V3
100
80*V1
100
Min
Step
1*V1
**
100
10.5
30000
30000
30000
140*V3
0.1
0.01
1*V3
1000000 1
140*V1
1000000 1
Max
Password
Level
110
Model
P341 P342 P343
** Max = 7 for Model 1,

8 for Model 2,
11 for Model 3
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
Label M5=0A09/0A0A
Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
Label M4=0A07/0A08
I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Neutral Displacement VT Secondary

Label M3=0A05/0A06
Neutral Displacement VT Primary

Label V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/
Label M1=0A01/0A02
Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
values for multiplier see mult

column
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 17 of 87
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Analog Channel 3
Analog Channel 4
Analog Channel 5
Analog Channel 6
Analog Channel 7
Analog Channel 8
Digital Input 1
Input 1 Trigger
Digital Input 2
Input 2 Trigger
Digital Input 3
Input 3 Trigger
Digital Input 4
Input 4 Trigger
Digital Input 5
Input 5 Trigger
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
Courier
Col Row
0C
UI
Analog Channel 2
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
Strings
40620
40619
40618
40617
40616
40615
40614
40613
40612
40611
40610
40609
40608
40607
40606
40605
40604
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
G31
Modbus
Datagroup
Setting
Setting
Setting
IB
IC
IN SEF
No Trigger
Relay 5
No Trigger
Relay 4
No Trigger
Relay 3
No Trigger
Relay 2
No Trigger
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
IA
Relay 1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
VN
VCN
VBN
Default Setting
Min
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Note: Number of signals is model

dependent
** Max = 7 for Model1,

8 for Model2.
11 for Model3

8 for Model2,
11 for Model3

8 for Model2,
11 for Model3

8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
11 for Model3

8 for Model2,

8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model 1,

8 for Model 2,
11 for Model 3
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 18 of 87
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Input 6 Trigger
Digital Input 7
Input 7 Trigger
Digital Input 8
Input 8 Trigger
Digital Input 9
Input 9 Trigger
Digital Input 10
Input 10 Trigger
Digital Input 11
Input 11 Trigger
Digital Input 12
Input 12 Trigger
Digital Input 13
Input 13 Trigger
Digital Input 14
Input 14 Trigger
Digital Input 15
Input 15 Trigger
Digital Input 16
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
Courier
Col Row
0C
UI
Digital Input 6
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
Strings
40641
40640
40639
40638
40637
40636
40635
40634
40633
40632
40631
40630
40629
40628
40627
40626
40625
40624
40623
40622
40621
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
Modbus
Datagroup
Not Used
Opto Input 2
No Trigger
Opto Input 8
Opto Input 1
No Trigger
Opto Input 7
Relay 14
No Trigger
Opto Input 6
Relay 13
No Trigger
Opto Input 5
Relay 12
No Trigger
Opto Input 4
Relay 11
No Trigger
Opto Input 3
Relay 10
No Trigger
Opto Input 2
Relay 9
No Trigger
Opto Input 1
Relay 8
No Trigger
Relay 7
No Trigger
Relay 6
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 19 of 87
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 19
Input 19 Trigger
Digital Input 20
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 24
Input 24 Trigger
Digital Input 25
Input 25 Trigger
Digital Input 26
Digital Input 23
Input 23 Trigger
0C
0C
Input 22 Trigger
0C
0C
Input 21 Trigger
Digital Input 22
0C
0C
Input 18 Trigger
0C
0C
Digital Input 18
Digital Input 21
0C
Input 17 Trigger
Input 20 Trigger
0C
Digital Input 17
3E
3D
3C
3B
3A
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
Courier
Col Row
0C
UI
Input 16 Trigger
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
Strings
40661
40660
40659
40658
40657
40656
40655
40654
40653
40652
40651
40650
40649
40648
40647
40646
40645
40644
40643
40642
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
Modbus
Datagroup
Not Used
Opto Input 12
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 11
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 10
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 9
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 8
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 7
No Trigger
Opto Input 6
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 5
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 4
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 3
No Trigger
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 20 of 87
07
08
Num Sub Periods
00
Roll Sub Period
0D
MEASURET SETUP
4B
06
0C
Input 32 Trigger
4A
Fix Dem Period
0C
Digital Input 32
49
05
0C
Input 31 Trigger
48
Measurement Mode
0C
Digital Input 31
47
04
0C
Input 30 Trigger
46
Measurement Ref
0C
Digital Input 30
45
03
0C
Input 29 Trigger
44
Remote Values
0C
Digital Input 29
43
02
0C
Input 28 Trigger
42
Local Values
0C
Digital Input 28
41
01
0C
Input 27 Trigger
40
Default Display
0C
Digital Input 27
3F
Courier
Col Row
0C
UI
Input 26 Trigger
Menu Text
Unsigned Integer
Courier Number (time-minutes)
Courier Number (time-minutes)
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G56
G54
G54
G52
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
Strings
40708
40707
40706
40705
40703
40702
40701
40700
40674
40673
40672
40671
40670
40669
40668
40667
40666
40665
40664
40663
40662
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G1
G2
G2
G1
G56
G54
G54
G52
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
Modbus
Datagroup
15
15
VA
Primary
Primary
Description
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 16
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 15
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 14
No Trigger
Not Used
Opto Input 13
No Trigger
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
15
99
99
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Number of rolling sub-periods
Rolling demand sub period
Fixed Demand Interval
Measurement Phase Reference
Remote Measurement Values
Local Measurement Values
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 21 of 87
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
Monitor Bit 1
Monitor Bit 2
Monitor Bit 3
Monitor Bit 4
Monitor Bit 5
Monitor Bit 6
Monitor Bit 7
Monitor Bit 8
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
0F
08
LED Status
0E
Function Type
07
0F
0E
Physical Link
06
Test Port Status
0E
Measuret Period
05
0F
0E
Parity
04
Relay O/P Status
0E
Baud Rate
04
01
0E
Baud Rate
03
0F
0E
Inactivity Timer
02
Opto I/P Status
0E
Remote Address
02
0F
0E
Remote Address
01
COMMISSION TESTS
0E
Rear Protocol
00
Courier
Col Row
0E
UI
COMMUNICATIONS
Menu Text
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Binary Flag(8 bits)

Indexed String

Indexed String

Indexed String
00
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
0-7
G21
G39
G38
G38
G71
Strings
Courier Number (Time-minutes)
Indexed String
Data type
40857
40856
40855
40854
40853
40852
40851
40850
30704
30703
30701
30700
Modbus
Start
30702
Address
End
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
0-7
0-7
G9
G8
Modbus
Datagroup
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
224
RS485
10
None
9600 bits/s
9600 bits/s
15
247
255
Courier
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Cell Type
Min
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
253
60
30
247
255
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Default LED 8
Default LED 7
Default LED 6
Default LED 5
Default LED 4
Default LED 3
Default LED 2
Default LED 1
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build=IEC60870-5-103
and Fibre Optic board fitted
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = Modbus
Build = Modbus
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = Modbus
Build = Courier or IEC60870-5-103
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 22 of 87
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A 0F
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DDB 64 - 95
DDB 96 - 127
DDB 128 - 159
DDB 160 - 191
DDB 192 - 223
DDB 224 - 255
DDB 256 - 287
DDB 288 - 319
DDB 320 - 351
DDB 352 - 383
DDB 384 - 415
DDB 416 - 447
DDB 448 - 479
DDB 480 - 511
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A 0F
DDB 32 - 63
0F
Test LEDs
N/A 0F
0F
Contact Test
DDB 0 - 31
0F
Test Pattern
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
10
0F
0E
0D
Courier
Col Row
0F
UI
Test Mode
Menu Text
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(16)
Courier Number (power)
Courier Number (power)
Binary Flag(8)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag(32)
Binary Flag (8bits)

Indexed String
Indexed String
Binary Flag (21bits)

Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G94
G93
G9
G37
Strings
30753
30701
30702
30704
30706
30708
30710
30712
30714
30717
30720
30721
30722
30751
30749
30747
30745
30743
30741
30739
30737
30735
30733
30731
30729
30727
30725
30723
40862
40861
40859
40858
Modbus
Start
30703
30705
30707
30709
30711
30713
30716
30719
30754
30752
30750
30748
30746
30744
30742
30740
30738
30736
30734
30732
30730
30728
30726
30724
40860
Address
End
G27
G1
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G29
G29
G30
G30
G1
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G94
G93
G9
G37
Modbus
Datagroup
No Operation
No Operation
Disabled
Default Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Command
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
20
Max
Step
Password
Level
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Model
P341 P342 P343
Relay Status (repeat of Courier status)

IA Magnitude
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
VAB Magnitude
VBC Magnitude
VCA Magnitude
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase Power Factor
Frequency
Relay Test Port Status
DDB Elements 0-31
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 23 of 87
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Broken I^
I^ Maintenance
I^ Maintenance
I^ Lockout
I^ Lockout
No. CB Ops Maint
No. CB Ops Maint
No. CB Ops Lock
No. CB Ops Lock
CB Time Maint
CB Time Maint
threshold
CB Time Lockout
CB Time Lockout
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Count
Fault Freq Time
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
10
UI
CB MONITOR SETUP
Menu Text
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
Strings
40170
40169
40168
40166
40165
40163
40162
40161
40160
40159
40158
40156
40155
40153
40152
40151
Modbus
Start
40171
40167
40164
40157
40154
Address
End
G35
G1
G88
G35
G88
G35
G88
G1
G88
G1
G88
G35
G88
G35
G88
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
3600
10
Alarm Disabled
0.2
Alarm Disabled
0.1
Alarm Disabled
20
Alarm Disabled
10
Alarm Disabled
2000
Alarm Disabled
1000
Alarm Disabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0.005
0.005
1 * NM1
1 * NM1
Min
9999
9999
0.5
0.5
10000
10000
25000
* NM1
* NM1
25000
Max
0.001
0.001
1 * NM1
1 * NM1
0.1
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Excessive Fault Frequency Time
Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Excessive fault frequency alarm
CB Operating Time lockout threshold
CB Operating Time lockout alarm
CB Operating Time maintenance
CB Operating Time maintenance alarm
CB Trips lockout threshold
Circuit Breaker Trips lockout alarm
CB Trips maintenance threshold
Circuit Breaker Trips maintenance

alarm
Broken Current lockout threshold
Broken Current lockout alarm
Broken Current maintenance

threshold
Broken Current maintenance alarm
Broken Current Index
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 24 of 87
30
30
30
31
Gen Diff k1
Gen Diff Is2
Gen Diff k2
GROUP 1
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
Power1 Function
P>1 Setting
P<1 Setting
P>1 Setting
Power1 TimeDelay
Power1 DO Timer
P1 Poledead Inh
Power2 Function
P>2 Setting
P<2 Setting
P>2 Setting
Power2 TimeDelay
Power2 DO Timer
POWER
30
Gen Diff Is1
30
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
30
UI
GenDiff Function
GEN DIFF
GROUP 1
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G102
G37
G102
G101
Strings
41062
41061
41060
41059
41058
41057
41056
41055
41054
41053
41052
41051
41050
41004
41003
41002
41001
41000
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G102
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G102
G2
G2
G2
G2
G101
Modbus
Datagroup
120
120
20
10
20
5
Disabled
Low Forward
Enabled
120
120
20
10
20
5
Over
Reverse
150
1.2
0.1
Percentage Bias
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
100
100
0.01
0.01
14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
0
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
0.01
100
0.01
100
14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
0
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
Model
P341 P342 P343
Password
Level
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2

4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2
10
0.1*I1
0.01*I1
Step
150
5*I1
20
0.5*I1
Max
20
1*I1
0.05*I1
Min
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 25 of 87
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
FFail Alm Angle
FFail Alm Delay
FFail1 Status
FFail1 -Xa1
FFail1 Xb1
FFail1 TimeDelay
FFail1 DO Timer
FFail2 Status
FFail2 -Xa2
FFail2 Xb2
FFail2 TimeDelay
FFail2 DO Timer
GROUP 1
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
I2>1 Alarm
I2>1 Current Set
I2>1 Time Delay
I2>2 Trip
I2>2 Current Set
I2>2 k Setting
I2>2 kRESET
I2>2 tMAX
NPS THERMAL
32
FFail Alm Status
FIELD FAILURE
32
GROUP 1
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
0E
Courier
Col Row
31
UI
P2 Poledead Inh
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Impedance)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
Strings
41157
41156
41155
41154
41153
41152
41151
41150
41112
41111
41110
41109
41108
41107
41106
41105
41104
41103
41102
41101
41100
41063
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G37
Modbus
Datagroup
1000
15
15
0.1
Enabled
20s
0.05
Enabled
110
20
Disabled
220
20
Enabled
15
Disabled
Enabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
500
0.05*I1
0.03*I1
2000
40
40
0.5*I1
100
0.5*I1
100
100
0.1
0.1
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01
40*V1/ I1 0.5*V1/I1 2
0.01
0.01
100
100
25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1
Model
P341 P342 P343
40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2
Password
Level
0.01
Step
100
75
Max
25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1
15
Min
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 26 of 87
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
Vector Rotation
V Dep OC Char
V Dep OC I> Set
V Dep OC T Dial
V Dep OC Reset
V Dep OC Delay
V Dep OC TMS
V Dep OC tRESET
V Dep OC V<1 Set
V Dep OC V<2 Set
V Dep OC k Set
Z< Setting
Z< Time Delay
Z< tRESET
GROUP 1
35
35
35
35
35
I>1 Function
I>1 Direction
I>1 Current Set
I>1 Time Delay
I>1 TMS
OVERCURRENT
34
Backup Function
SYSTEM BACKUP
34
GROUP 1
05
04
03
02
01
00
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
09
Courier
Col Row
33
UI
I2>2 tMIN
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G44
G43
G111
G104
G103
Strings
41254
41253
41252
41251
41250
41214
41213
41212
41211
41210
41209
41208
41207
41206
41205
41204
41203
41202
41201
41200
41158
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G2
G44
G43
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G60
G2
G2
G111
G104
G103
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
Setting
Cell Type
Non-Directional
IEC S Inverse
Disabled
70
0.25
60
80
DT
IEC S Inverse
None
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Voltage controlled Setting
0.25
Default Setting
0.025
0.08*I1
1.2
100
4.0*I1
10
100
100
0.025
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01
120*V1/I10.5*V1/I1 2
Password
Level
2*V1/I1
0.05
1*V1
1*V1
0.01
0.025
0.01
0.1
0.01*I1
0.01
Step
120*V1
120*V1
100
1.2
100
15
4*I1
100
Max
0.25
20*V1
20*V1
0.025
0.5
0.8*I1
Min
Model
P341 P342 P343
Apply to DT trip characteristic only
OC reset characteritic selection.
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 27 of 87
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
38
I>1 tRESET
I>2 Function
I>2 Direction
I>2 Current Set
I>2 Time Delay
I>2 TMS
I>2 Time Dial
I>2 Reset Char
I>2 tRESET
I>3 Status
I>3 Direction
I>3 Current Set
I>3 Time Delay
I>4 Status
I>4 Direction
I>4 Current Set
I>4 Time Delay
I> Char Angle
I> Function Link
GROUP 1
38
38
IN Input
IN>1 Function
EARTH FAULT
35
I>1 Reset Char
02
01
00
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
Courier
Col Row
35
UI
I>1 Time Dial
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G43
G49
G14
G44
G37
G44
G37
G60
G44
G43
G105
G60
Strings
41400
41275
41274
41273
41272
41271
41270
41269
41268
41267
41266
41265
41264
41263
41262
41261
41260
41259
41258
41257
41256
41255
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G43
G14
G2
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G44
G43
G105
G2
G60
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
IEC S Inverse
Derived
Measured
15
30
20
Non-Directional
Disabled
20
Non-Directional
Disabled
DT
1
0
1
10
Non-Directional
Disabled
DT
DT
Default Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
15
-95
0.08*I1
0.08*I1
0.5
0.025
0.08*I1
0.08*I1
0
0
0.5
Min
10
95
100
32*I1
100
32*I1
100
15
1.2
100
4.0*I1
10.0*I1
10
1
100
15
Max
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01*I1
1
1
0.01
0.1
Step
2
2
2
2
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
I> Characteristic Angle
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 28 of 87
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
IN>1 Current
IN>1 Time Delay
IN>1 TMS
IN>1 Time Dial
IN>1 Reset Char
IN>1 tRESET
IN>2 Function
IN>2 Direction
IN>2 Current
IN>2 Time Delay
IN>2 TMS
IN>2 Time Dial
IN>2 Reset Char
IN>2 tRESET
IN>3 Status
IN>3 Direction
IN>3 Current
IN>3 Time Delay
IN>4 Status
IN>4 Direction
IN>4 Current
IN>4 Time Delay
IN> Func Link
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
Courier
Col Row
38
UI
IN>1 Direction
Menu Text
Binary Flags
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G63
G44
G37
G44
G37
G60
G44
G43
G105
G60
G44
Strings
41424
41423
41422
41421
41420
41419
41418
41417
41416
41415
41414
41413
41412
41411
41410
41409
41408
41407
41406
41405
41404
41403
41402
41401
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G63
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G44
G43
G105
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G44
Modbus
Datagroup
15
0.5
Non-Directional
Disabled
0.5
Non-Directional
Disabled
DT
1
0
0.2
0.45
Non-Directional
Disabled
Disabled
DT
0.2
0.1
Non-Directional
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
15
0.08*I1
0.08*I1
0.5
0.025
0.08*I1
0.02*I2
0
0
0.5
0.025
0.08*I1
0.02*I2
Min
200
32*I1
200
32*I1
100
15
1.2
200
4.0*I1
10.0*I2
10
1
100
15
1.2
200
4.0*I1
4.0*I2
Max
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01*I2
1
1
0.01
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.01*I1
0.01*I2
Step
2
2
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 29 of 87
38
38
38
38
38
3A
IN> Pol
IN> VNpol Input
IN> VNpol Set
IN> V2pol Set
IN> I2pol Set
GROUP 1
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
SEF/REF Options
ISEF>1 Function
ISEF>1 Direction
ISEF>1 Current
ISEF>1 Delay
ISEF>1 TMS
ISEF>1 Time Dial
ISEF>1 Reset Chr
ISEF>1 tRESET
ISEF>2 Function
ISEF>2 Direction
ISEF>2 Current
ISEF>2 Delay
ISEF>2 TMS
ISEF>2 Time Dial
ISEF>2 Reset Chr
SEF/REF PROTN
38
IN> Char Angle
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
Courier
Col Row
38
UI
IN> DIRECTIONAL
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number(Angle)
(Sub Heading)
Data type
G60
G44
G43
G60
G44
G43
G105
G58
G49
G46
Strings
41515
41514
41513
41512
41511
41510
41509
41508
41507
41506
41505
41504
41503
41502
41501
41500
41430
41429
41428
41427
41426
41425
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G44
G43
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G44
G43
G105
G58
G2
G2
G2
G49
G46
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
DT
0.05
Non-Directional
Disabled
DT
0.05
Non-Directional
DT
SEF
0.08
Measured
Zero Sequence
-60
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
10
100
15
1.2
0.5
0.025
15
1.2
200
0.005*I3 0.1*I3
0.5
0.025
200
0.1*I3
0.005*I3
0
10
1
2
5
1*I1
25*V1
22*V1
95
Max
0
0
0
0
0.08*I1
0.5*V1
0.5*V1
-95
Min
2
2
Password
Level
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.00025*I3
0.01
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.00025*I3 2
1
1
1
1
0.01*I1
0.5*V1
0.5*V1
Step
Model
P341 P342 P343
V1 applied for VN set to dervied.
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 30 of 87
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
ISEF>3 Status
ISEF>3 Direction
ISEF>3 Current
ISEF>3 Delay
ISEF>4 Status
ISEF>4 Direction
ISEF>4 Current
ISEF>4 Delay
ISEF> Func Link
ISEF DIRECTIONAL
ISEF> Char Angle
ISEF>VNpol Input
ISEF> VNpol Set
WATTMETRIC SEF
PN> Setting
RESTRICTED E/F
IREF> k1
IREF> k2
IREF> Is1
IREF> Is2
IREF> Is
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Courier
Col Row
3A
UI
ISEF>2 tRESET
Menu Text
(Sub Heading)
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Courier Number(Angle)
(Sub Heading)
Binary Flags
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G49
G64
G44
G37
G44
G37
Strings
41534
41533
41532
41531
41530
41529
41528
41527
41526
41525
41524
41523
41522
41521
41520
41519
41518
41517
41516
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G49
G2
G64
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
G2
G44
G37
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
0.2
0.2
150
20
Measured
90
15
0.25
0.6
Non-Directional
Disabled
0.5
0.4
Non-Directional
Disabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
100
Max
200
22*V1
22*V3
95
4
1
200
Password
Level
0.5*V1
0.5*V3
1
1
0.01
2
2
0.001*I3 2
0.01
0.001*I3 2
0.01
Step
0.05*I3
0.1*I1
0.05*I1
1.0*I3
1.5*I1
1.0*I1
150
20
0.01*I3
0.01*I1
0.01*I1
0.0*V1*I3 20*V1*I3 0.05*V1*I3

0.0*V3*I3 20*V3*I3 0.05*V3*I3
0.5*V1
0.5*V3
-95
15
1
0.005*I3 0.8*I3
0.005*I3 0.8*I3
Min
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Model
P341 P342 P343
* V1 applied when VN set to dervied.

* V3 applied when VN set to measured
V1 applied when VN set to dervied.

V3 applied when VN set to measured
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 31 of 87
3B
3B
3B
3B
3B
3B
3B
3C
VN>1 Voltage Set
VN>1 Time Delay
VN>1 TMS
VN>1 tReset
VN>2 Status
VN>2 Voltage Set
VN>2 Time Delay
GROUP 1
3C
3C
3C
3D
100% St EF VN3H<
100% St EF Delay
100% St EF V<Inh
GROUP 1
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
V/Hz Alm Status
V/Hz Alarm Set
V/Hz Alarm Delay
V/Hz Trip Func
V/Hz Trip Set
VOLTS/HZ
3C
100%St EF Status
100% STATOR EF
3B
VN>1 Function
3B
05
04
03
02
01
00
04
03
02
01
00
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
3B
UI
VN Input
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
GROUP 1
Menu Text
Courier Number (Volts/Hz)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Volts/Hz)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data type
G23
G37
G37
G37
G23
G49
Strings
41654
41653
41652
41651
41650
41603
41602
41601
41600
41558
41557
41556
41555
41554
41553
41552
41551
41550
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G23
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G23
G49
Modbus
Datagroup
2.42
DT
10
2.31
Enabled
80
Enabled
10
10
Disabled
DT
Measured
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
1.5*V1
1.5*V1
30*V1
0.3*V3
1*V1
1*V3
0.5
1*V1
1*V3
Min
3.5*V1
100
3.5*V1
120*V1
100
20*V3
100
50*V1
50*V3
100
100
100
50*V1
50*V3
Max
0.01*V1
0.01
0.01*V1
1*V1
0.01
0.1*V3
0.01
1*V1
1*V3
0.01
0.5
0.01
1*V1
1*V3
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343


Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 32 of 87
3E
GROUP 1
3E
3E
3E
3E
3F
df/dt Setting
df/dt Time Delay
df/dt f Low
df/dt f High
GROUP 1
3F
40
V Shift Angle
GROUP 1
40
40
40
40
41
Dead Mach I>
Dead Mach V<
Dead Mach tPU
Dead Mach tDO
GROUP 1
41
41
41
Reconnect Status
Reconnect Delay
Reconnect tPULSE
RECONNECT DELAY
40
Dead Mach Status
DEAD MACHINE
3F
V Shift Status
V VECTOR SHIFT
3E
df/dt Status
DF/DT
3D
V/Hz Trip Delay
03
02
01
00
05
04
03
02
01
00
02
01
00
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
06
Courier
Col Row
3D
UI
V/Hz Trip TMS
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Frequency)
Indexed String
Data type
G37
G37
G37
G37
Strings
41853
41852
41850
41804
41803
41802
41801
41800
41751
41750
41704
41703
41702
41701
41700
41656
41655
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
60
Enabled
0.5
80
0.1
Disabled
10
Enabled
50.5
49.5
0.5
0.2
Enabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0.01
10*V1
0.08*I1
45
45
0.1
Min
30
300
10
10
120*V1
4*I1
30
65
65
100
10
100
63
Max
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
1*V1
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 33 of 87
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
V< Measurt Mode
V< Operate Mode
V<1 Function
V<1 Voltage Set
V<1 Time Delay
V<1 TMS
V<1 Poledead Inh
V<2 Status
V<2 Voltage Set
V<2 Time Delay
V<2 Poledead Inh
OVERVOLTAGE
V> Measurt Mode
V> Operate Mode
V>1 Function
V>1 Voltage Set
V>1 Time Delay
V>1 TMS
V>2 Status
V>2 Voltage Set
V>2 Time Delay
42
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
42
UI
UNDER VOLTAGE
VOLT PROTECTION
GROUP 1
Menu Text
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Data type
G37
G23
G48
G47
G37
G37
G37
G23
G48
G47
Strings
41969
41968
41967
41966
41965
41964
41963
41962
41961
41960
41959
41958
41957
41956
41955
41954
41953
41952
41951
41950
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G23
G48
G47
G37
G2
G2
G37
G37
G2
G2
G2
G23
G48
G47
Modbus
Datagroup
0.5
150
Disabled
10
130
DT
Any Phase
Phase-Phase
Enabled
38
Disabled
Enabled
10
50
DT
Any Phase
Phase-Neutral
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
60*V1
0.5
60*V1
10*V1
0.5
10*V1
Min
100
185*V1
100
100
185*V1
100
70*V1
100
100
120*V1
Max
0.01
1*V1
0.5
0.01
1*V1
0.01
1*V1
0.5
0.01
1*V1
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Phase-Neutral
Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 34 of 87
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
44
F<1 Time Delay
F<2 Status
F<2 Setting
F<2 Time Delay
F<3 Status
F<3 Setting
F<3 Time Delay
F<4 Status
F<4 Setting
F<4 Time Delay
F< Function Link
OVER FREQUENCY
F>1 Status
F>1 Setting
F>1 Time Delay
F>2 Status
F>2 Setting
F>2 Time Delay
GROUP 1
Select RTD
44
43
F<1 Setting
RTD PROTECTION
43
F<1 Status
43
01
00
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Courier
Col Row
43
UI
UNDER FREQUENCY
FREQ PROTECTION
GROUP 1
Menu Text
G37
G37
G65
G37
G37
G37
G37
Strings
42018
42017
42016
42015
42014
42013
42012
42011
42010
42009
42008
42007
42006
42005
42004
42003
42002
42001
42000
Modbus
Start
Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed StringG50 42050
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Data type
Address
End
G50
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G65
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
Modbus
Datagroup
51
Disabled
50.5
Enabled
16
48
Disabled
48.5
Disabled
49
Disabled
49.5
Enabled
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
1023
45
45
15
45
45
45
45
Min
10
100
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
Max
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 35 of 87
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
RTD 1 Alarm Dly
RTD 1 Trip Set
RTD 1 Trip Dly
RTD 2 Alarm Set
RTD 2 Alarm Dly
RTD 2 Trip Set
RTD 2 Trip Dly
RTD 3 Alarm Set
RTD 3 Alarm Dly
RTD 3 Trip Set
RTD 3 Trip Dly
RTD 4 Alarm Set
RTD 4 Alarm Dly
RTD 4 Trip Set
RTD 4 Trip Dly
RTD 5 Alarm Set
RTD 5 Alarm Dly
RTD 5 Trip Set
RTD 5 Trip Dly
RTD 6 Alarm Set
RTD 6 Alarm Dly
RTD 6 Trip Set
RTD 6 Trip Dly
RTD 7 Alarm Set
RTD 7 Alarm Dly
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
Courier
Col Row
44
UI
RTD 1 Alarm Set
Menu Text
Strings
Data type
42076
42075
42074
42073
42072
42071
42070
42069
42068
42067
42066
42065
42064
42063
42062
42061
42060
42059
42058
42057
42056
42055
42054
42053
42052
42051
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
Modbus
Datagroup
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
Default Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Min
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 36 of 87
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
45
RTD 8 Alarm Set
RTD 8 Alarm Dly
RTD 8 Trip Set
RTD 8 Trip Dly
RTD 9 Alarm Set
RTD 9 Alarm Dly
RTD 9 Trip Set
RTD 9 Trip Dly
RTD 10 Alarm Set
RTD 10 Alarm Dly
RTD 10 Trip Set
RTD 10 Trip Dly
GROUP 1
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
BREAKER FAIL
CB Fail 1 Status
CB Fail 1 Timer
CB Fail 2 Status
CB Fail 2 Timer
CBF Non I Reset
CBF Ext Reset
UNDER CURRENT
I< Current Set
IN< Current Set
CB FAIL & I<
44
RTD 7 Trip Dly
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
Courier
Col Row
44
UI
RTD 7 Trip Set
Menu Text
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
G68
G68
G37
G37
Strings
Data type
42107
42106
42105
42104
42103
42102
42101
42100
42090
42089
42088
42087
42086
42085
42084
42083
42082
42081
42080
42079
42078
42077
Modbus
Start
Address
End
G2
G2
G68
G68
G2
G37
G2
G37
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
Modbus
Datagroup
0.1
Setting
Setting
Setting
CB Open & I<
0.1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
CB Open & I<
0.4
Disabled
0.2
Enabled
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
10
80
85
Default Setting
0.02*I2
0.02*I1
Min
3.2*I2
3.2*I1
10
10
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
200
Max
0.01*I2
0.01*I1
0.01
0.01
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 37 of 87
45
45
46
CBF Blocks I>
CBF Blocks IN>
GROUP 1
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
4A
VTS Status
VTS Reset Mode
VTS Time Delay
VTS I> Inhibit
VTS I2> Inhibit
CT SUPERVISION
CTS Status
CTS VN Input
CTS VN< Inhibit
CTS IN> Set
CTS Time Delay
GROUP 1
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
Opto Input 1
Opto Input 2
Opto Input 3
Opto Input 4
Opto Input 5
INPUT LABELS
46
VT SUPERVISION
SUPERVISION
45
BLOCKED O/C
05
04
03
02
01
00
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
0E
0D
0C
0B
Courier
Col Row
45
UI
ISEF< Current
Menu Text
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Data type
G49
G37
G69
G7
G37
G37
Strings
42332
42324
42316
42308
42300
42159
42158
42157
42156
42155
42154
42153
42152
42151
42150
42110
42109
42108
Modbus
Start
42339
42331
42323
42315
42307
Address
End
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G2
G2
G2
G49
G37
G2
G2
G2
G69
G7
G37
G37
G2
Modbus
Datagroup
L5 Reset
Setting
32
32
L4 Block I>3&4
L4 Block I>2
32
32
0.08*I1
0.5*V1
0.05*I1
0.08*I1
L3 Block IN>3&4 Setting

L3 Block IN>2
Setting
Max
163
163
163
163
163
10
4*I1
22*V1
0.5*I1
32*I1
10
0.001* I3 0.8*I3
Min
32
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Setting
L2 Setting Group
L1 Setting Group
0.2
Derived
Disabled
0.05
10
Manual
Blocking
Disabled
Disabled
0.02
Default Setting
Password
Level
0.01*I1
0.5*V1
0.01*I1
0.01*I1
0.1
0.0005*I3 2
Step
Model
P341 P342 P343
Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 38 of 87
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4B
Opto Input 8
Opto Input 9
Opto Input 10
Opto Input 11
Opto Input 12
Opto Input 13
Opto Input 14
Opto Input 15
Opto Input 16
GROUP 1
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
Relay 8
Relay 9
Relay 10
OUTPUT LABELS
4A
Opto Input 7
0A
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
Courier
Col Row
4A
UI
Opto Input 6
Menu Text
Data type
Strings
42522
42514
42506
42498
42490
42482
42474
42466
42458
42450
42420
42412
42404
42396
42388
42380
42372
42364
42356
42348
42340
Modbus
Start
42529
42521
42513
42505
42497
42489
42481
42473
42465
42457
42427
42419
42411
42403
42395
42387
42379
42371
42363
42355
42347
Address
End
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
Modbus
Datagroup
Setting
R10 SysBack Trip
R9 Diff Trip
R8 Freq Trip
R7 Control Trip
R7 V or F Trip
R7 Volt Trip
R6 Control Close
R6 E/F Trip
R5 CB Fail
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
R4 General Alarm Setting
R3 Any Trip
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Model
P341 P342 P343
32
Password
Level
R2 I>1 Start
Setting
R2 Trip PrimeMov
Step
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Max
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Min
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
R1 IN>1 Start
R1 Trip CB
L16 Not Used
L15 Not Used
L14 Not Used
L13 Not Used
L12 Not Used
L11 Not Used
L10 Not Used
L9 Not Used
L8 52b
L7 52a
L6 Ext Prot Trip
Default Setting
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 39 of 87
4B
4B
4C
Relay 13
Relay 14
GROUP 1
05
06
07
08
09
0A
RTD 5
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
RTD 9
RTD 10
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
65535
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Max
Step
Password
Level
N/A B0
B0
B0
B0
(No Header)
Select Record
Faulted Phase
Start Elements1
03
02
01
00
Indexed String
Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG84

G16
47000
48999
Data
Data
*
00
Repeat of Group 1
90
Model
P341 P342 P343
GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS
00
46999
G16
RTD 10
RTD 9
RTD 8
RTD 7
RTD 6
RTD 5
RTD 4
Setting
32
32
32
32
32
32
Min
70
45000
G84
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
RTD 3
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
Repeat of Group 1
44999
42829
42821
42813
42805
42797
42789
42781
G3
RTD 2
RTD 1
R14 V/Hz Trip
R13 Power Trip
R12 Ffail Trip
R11 NPS Trip
Default Setting
00
43000
42822
42814
42806
42798
42790
42782
42774
42773
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
Modbus
Datagroup
50
Auto extraction Event Record Column
42766
42765
42757
42561
42553
42545
42537
Address
End
04
RTD 4
42758
42750
42554
42546
42538
42530
Modbus
Start
Repeat of Group 1
03
RTD 3
Strings
02
RTD 2
Data type
01
00
0E
0D
0C
RTD 1
RTD LABELS
4B
Relay 12
0B
Courier
Col Row
4B
UI
Relay 11
Menu Text
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
* Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
0006=P34????B*
0927=1 AND 091F=1 AND
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 40 of 87
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
Fault Alarms
Fault Time
Active Group
System Frequency
Fault Duration
CB Operate Time
Relay Trip Time
IA
B0
B0
B0
IB-2
IC-2
IA Differential
1A
19
18
17
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
B0
Data
IA-2
16
B0
15
Data
Data
Data
VCN
B0
VBN
14
13
12
Model
P341 P342 P343
B0
Password
Level
VAN
Step
B0
Max
VCA
Min
B0
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
VBC
Default Setting
11
G87
G86
G85
G107
Modbus
Datagroup
B0
Address
End
VAB
10
Unsigned Integer
IEC870 Time & Date
Modbus
Start
B0
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
07
06
05
Strings
Data type
IC-1
IC
IB-1
IB
B0
B0
Tripped Elements2
IA-1
B0
Trip Elements1
04
Courier
Col Row
B0
UI
Start Elements2
Menu Text
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 41 of 87
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
26
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
B0
VN Measured
VN Derived
IN Measured
IN Derived
IN Sensitive
IREF Diff
IREF Bias
I2
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase VARs
3 Phase Power Factor B0
N/A B1
IC Differential
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
RTD 4
RTD 5
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
RTD 9
RTD 10
df/dt
V Vector Shift
No Header)
Courier Number (VARs)
Courier Number (Watts)
Data type
00
32
31
30
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
Strings
Auto extraction Maintenance

Record Column
Courier Number (No unit)
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
Courier
Col Row
B0
UI
B Differential
Menu Text
Modbus
Start
Address
End
Modbus
Datagroup
Default Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Menu Text
Comment
UI
Menu Text UI
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 42 of 87
B4
B4
B4
B4
Select Record
Trigger Time
Format
Upload
N/A B4
(No Header)
B3
Recorder Source
N/A B3
(No Header)
B3
B2
Data Transfer
UNUSED
B2
B2
B2
Length
Transfer Mode
B2
Start
Reference
B2
(No Header)
Version
B1
N/A B2
Record Data
B2
B1
Record Type
Sub-Domain
B1
Record Text
B2
B1
Time and Date
Domain
B1
Col
Select Record
Courier
0B
0A
02
01
00
02
01
00
20
1C
18
14
10
0C
08
04
00
05
04
03
02
01
Row
Strings
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
IEC870 Time & Date
Unsigned Integer
Disturbance Record Extraction
Indexed String
Disturbance Recorder Control
Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers
Unsigned Integer Indexed StringsG76
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Data Transfer
IEC Date and Time
UINT16
Data type
G1
G1
G1
G12
30802
30803
40250
30930
30933
G1
30801
G76
G90
G57
Datagroup
Modbus
G1
30929
End
Address
30800
Start
Modbus
Samples
256
Group 1
PSL Settings
Default Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Cell Type
-199
Setting
Min
65535
199
65535
65535
Max
Step
Password
Level
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
P341 P342 P343
Model
Number of Disturbance Records

(0 to 200)
Oldest Stored Disturbance Record
(1 to 65535)
Number of Registers in Current Page
Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535)
Select Disturbance Record
Timestamp of selected record
*Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 43 of 87
01
03
BF
BF
BF
BF
Setting Transfer
Reset Demand
UNUSED
Block Xfer Ref
06
05
04
BF
Dist Record Extract Ref
BF
Dist Record Cntrl Ref
Courier
Col Row
00
UI
COMMS SYS DATA N/A BF
Menu Text
Menu Cell(2)
None (Reset Menu Cell)
Unsigned Integer
02
Menu Cell(2)
Data type
Menu Cell(2)
Strings
Modbus
Start
Address
End
Modbus
Datagroup
B200
B300
Default Setting
Data
Min
Max
Data
Data(but supports Reset Menu cell)
Setting
B400
Data
Cell Type
Step
Password
Level
Model
P341 P342 P343
Block Transfer Reference
Reset Measurements Demand values
Disturbance Record Extraction Reference
Disturbance Record Control reference
Comment
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 44 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Data types and indexed string settings

TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
G1
1 Register
UNSIGNED INTEGER
Range 0 to 65535
G2
1 Register
NUMERIC SETTING
Value = (Setting - Minimum) / Step Size
G3
G4
Variable number of Registers
ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS
0x00FF
Second character
0xFF00
First character
2 Registers
PLANT STATUS
(Second reg, First Reg)
G5
0x0000,0x0001
CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0002
CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0004
Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
2 Registers
CONTROL STATUS

0x0000,0x0001
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 45 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
G6
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
1 Register
RECORD CONTROL COMMAND REGISTER
No operation
Clear Event records
Clear Fault Record
Clear Maintenance Records
Reset Indications
G7
G8
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 46 of 87
VTS INDICATE / BLOCK

0
Blocking
Indication
1 Register
LOGIC INPUT STATUS
0x0001
Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0002
0x0004
0x0008
0x0010
0x0020
0x0040
0x0080
0x0100
P343 only
0x0200
P343 only
0x0400
P343 only
0x0800
P343 only
0x1000
P343 only
0x2000
P343 only
0x4000
P343 only
0x8000
P343 only
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G9
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 47 of 87
DESCRIPTION
RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
G10
0x0000,0x0001
Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
P343 only
0x0000,0x0200
P343 only
0x0000,0x0400
P343 only
0x0000,0x0800
P343 only
0x0000,0x1000
P343 only
0x0000,0x2000
P343 only
0x0000,0x4000
Not Used
0x0000,0x8000
Not Used
0x0001,0x0000
Not Used
0x0002,0x0000
Not Used
0x0004,0x0000
Not Used
0x0008,0x0000
Not Used
0x0010,0x0000
Not Used
1 Register
Signed fixed point number, 1 decimal place
P343 only
Range -3276.8 to 3276.7
G11
G12
YES/NO
0
No
Yes
4 registers
TIME AND DATE

This will take the IEC 870 format
0x007F
First register - Years
0x0FFF
Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x9FBF
Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0xFFFF
Fourth Register - Milli-seconds
G13
EVENT RECORD TYPE (MODBUS)

0
Latched alarm active
Latched alarm inactive
Self reset alarm active
Self reset alarm inactive
Relay event
Opto event
Protection event
Platform event
Fault logged event
Maintenance record logged event
G14
I> FUNCTION LINK
(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional)
Bit 0
I>1 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 1
I>2 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 2
I>3 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 3
I>4 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 4
Not Used
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
G15
DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS

0
No Record
Unextracted
Extracted
G16
FAULTED PHASE
0x0001
Start A
0x0002
Start B
0x0004
Start C
0x0008
Start N
0x0010
Trip A
0x0020
Trip B
0x0040
Trip C
0x0080
Trip N
G17
IRIG-B STATUS
0
Card not fitted
Card failed
Signal healthy
No signal
G18
RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER

0
No Operation
Select next event
Accept Event
Select next Disurbance Record
Accept disturbance record
Select Next Disturbance record page
G19
G20
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 48 of 87
LANGUAGE
0
English
Francais
Deutsch
Espanol
PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS)
0x0000, 0x00FF
First password character
0x0000, 0xFF00
Second password character
0x00FF, 0x0000
Third password character
0xFF00, 0x0000
Fourth password character

NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL
ALWAYS INDICATE AN * IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE
THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
G21
IEC870 INTERFACE
0
RS485
Fibre Optic
G22
PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL

0
Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2.
Level 1 - Password required for level 2.
Level 2 - No passwords required.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G23
G24
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 49 of 87
DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE AND V/HZ CURVE SELECTION
Disabled
DT
IDMT
2 Registers
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES

High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25
1 Register
UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES

Example 50.050 stored as 50050
Range -32.768 to 32.767
G26
G27
RELAY STATUS
0x0001
Event
0x0002
Disturbance
0x0004
Alarm
0x0008
Trip
0x0010
Out of Service
0x0020
Plant
0x0040
Control
0x0080
Unused
0x0100
Unused
0x0200
Unused
0x0400
Unused
0x0800
Unused
0x1000
Unused
0x2000
Unused
0x4000
Unused
0x8000
Unused
2 REGISTERS
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE

High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Range -2.147E9 to 2.147E9
G28
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS

Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary)
Range -32768 to 32767
G29
3 REGISTER
POWER MULTIPLER
All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a
2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27
Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary)
For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110
For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
Range -1.40E14 to 1.40E14
G30
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES

Range -327.68 to 327.67
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G31
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 50 of 87
DESCRIPTION
ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
P341
P342
VAN
VAN
VAN
VBN
VBN
VBN
VCN
VCN
VCN
VN
VN
VN
IA
IA
IA-1
IB
IB
IB-1
IC
IC
IC-1
IN Sensitive
IN
IN
IN Sensitive
IN Sensitive
P343
IA-2
10
IB-2
11
IC-2
G32
DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (See DDB)

P341
P342
P343
Unused
Unused
Unused
R1 IN>1 Start
R1 Trip CB
R1 Trip CB
R2 I>1 Start
R2 Trip PrimeMov
R2 Trip PrimeMov
R3 Any Trip
R3 Any Trip
R3 Any Trip
R4 General Alarm
R4 General Alarm
R4 General Alarm
R5 CB Fail
R5 CB Fail
R5 CB Fail
R6 Control Close
R6 E/F trip
R6 E/F Trip
R7 Control Trip
R7 V or F Trip
R7 Volt Trip
L1 Setting group
L1 Setting Group
R8 Freq Trip
L2 Setting group
L2 Setting Group
R9 Diff Trip
10
L3 Block IN>3&4
L3 Block IN>2
R10 SysBack Trip

R11 NPS Trip
11
L4 Block I> 3&4
L4 Block I>2
12
L5 Reset
L5 Reset
R12 Ffail Trip
13
L6 Ext Prot Trip
L6 Ext Prot Trip
R13 Power trip
14
L7 52a
L7 52a
R14 V/Hz trip
15
L8 52b
L8 52b
L1 Setting Group
16
LED 1
LED 1
L2 Setting Group
17
LED 2
LED 2
L3 Block IN>2
18
LED 3
LED 3
L4 Block I>2
19
LED 4
LED 4
L5 Reset
20
LED 5
LED 5
L6 Ext Prot Trip
21
LED 6
LED 6
L7 52a
22
LED 7
LED 7
L8 52b
23
LED 8
LED 8
L9 Not Used
24
SG-opto Invalid
SG-opto Invalid
L10 Not Used
25
Protn Disabled
Protn Disabled
L11 Not Used
26
VT Fail Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
L12 Not Used
27
CT Fail Alarm
CT Fail Alarm
L13 Not Used
28
CB Fail Alarm
CB Fail Alarm
L14 Not Used
29
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
L15 Not Used
30
I^ Lockout Alarm
I^ Lockout Alarm
L16 Not Used
31
CB Ops Maint
CB Ops Maint
LED 1
32
CB Ops Lockout
CB Ops Lockout
LED 2
33
CB Op Time Maint
CB Op Time Maint
LED 3
34
CB Op Time Lock
CB Op Time Lock
LED 4
35
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Lock
LED 5
36
CB Status Alarm
CB Status Alarm
LED 6
37
Man CB Trip Fail
Man CB Trip Fail
LED 7
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 51 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
38
Man CB Cls Fail
Man CB Cls Fail
39
Man CB Unhealthy
Man CB Unhealthy
SG-opto Invalid
40
F out of range
NPS Alarm
Protn Disabled
41
Freq Prot Alm
V/Hz Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
42
Voltage Prot Alm
Field Fail Alarm
CT Fail Alarm
43
User Alarm 1
RTD Thermal Alm
CB Fail Alarm
44
User Alarm 2
RTD Open Cct
I^ Maint Alarm
45
User Alarm 3
RTD short Cct
I^ Lockout Alarm
46
User Alarm 4
RTD Data Error
CB Ops Maint
47
df/dt Trip
RTD Board Fail
CB Ops Lockout
48
V Shift Trip
Freq Prot Alm
CB Op Time Maint
49
IN>1 Trip
Voltage Prot Alm
CB Op Time Lock
50
IN>2 Trip
User Alarm 1
Fault Freq Lock
51
IN>3 Trip
User Alarm 2
CB Status Alarm
52
IN>4 Trip
User Alarm 3
Man CB Trip Fail
53
IREF> Trip
User Alarm 4
Man CB Cls Fail
54
ISEF>1 Trip
Field Fail1 Trip
Man CB Unhealthy
55
ISEF>2 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip
NPS Alarm
56
ISEF>3 Trip
NPS Trip
V/Hz Alarm
57
ISEF>4 Trip
Sys Back Trip
Field Fail Alarm
58
VN>1 Trip
Sys Back Trip A
RTD Thermal Alm
59
VN>2 Trip
Sys Back Trip B
RTD Open Cct
60
V<1 Trip
Sys Back Trip C
RTD short Cct
61
V<1 Trip A/AB
V/Hz Trip
RTD Data Error
62
V<1 Trip B/BC
RTD 1 Trip
RTD Board Fail
63
V<1 Trip C/CA
RTD 2 Trip
Freq Prot Alm
64
V<2 Trip
RTD 3 Trip
Voltage Prot Alm
65
V<2 Trip A/AB
RTD 4 Trip
User Alarm 1
66
V<2 Trip B/BC
RTD 5 Trip
User Alarm 2
67
V<2 Trip C/CA
RTD 6 Trip
User Alarm 3
68
V>1 Trip
RTD 7 Trip
User Alarm 4
69
V>1 Trip A/AB
RTD 8 Trip
100% ST EF Trip
70
V>1 Trip B/BC
RTD 9 Trip
DeadMachine trip
71
V>1 Trip C/CA
RTD 10 Trip
Gen Diff Trip
72
V>2 Trip
Any RTD Trip
Gen Diff Trip A
73
V>2 Trip A/AB
IN>1 Trip
Gen Diff Trip B
74
V>2 Trip B/BC
IN>2 Trip
Gen Diff Trip C
75
V>2 Trip C/CA
IREF> Trip
Field Fail1 Trip
76
F<1 Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip
77
F<2 Trip
VN>1 Trip
NPS Trip
78
F<3 Trip
VN>2 Trip
Sys Back Trip
79
F<4 Trip
V<1 Trip
Sys Back Trip A
80
F>1 Trip
V<1 Trip A/AB
Sys Back Trip B
81
F>2 Trip
V<1 Trip B/BC
Sys Back Trip C
82
Power1 Trip
V<1 Trip C/CA
V/Hz Trip
83
Power2 Trip
V<2 Trip
RTD 1 Trip
84
I>1 Trip
V<2 Trip A/AB
RTD 2 Trip
85
I>1 Trip A
V<2 Trip B/BC
RTD 3 Trip
86
I>1 Trip B
V<2 Trip C/CA
RTD 4 Trip
87
I>1 Trip C
V>1 Trip
RTD 5 Trip
88
I>2 Trip
V>1 Trip A/AB
RTD 6 Trip
89
I>2 Trip A
V>1 Trip B/BC
RTD 7 Trip
90
I>2 Trip B
V>1 Trip C/CA
RTD 8 Trip
91
I>2 Trip C
V>2 Trip
RTD 9 Trip
92
I>3 Trip
V>2 Trip A/AB
RTD 10 Trip
LED 8
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 52 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
93
I>3 Trip A
V>2 Trip B/BC
Any RTD Trip
94
I>3 Trip B
V>2 Trip C/CA
IN>1 Trip
95
I>3 Trip C
F<1 Trip
IN>2 Trip
96
I>4 Trip
F<2 Trip
IREF> Trip
97
I>4 Trip A
F<3 Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
98
I>4 Trip B
F<4 Trip
VN>1 Trip
99
I>4 Trip C
F>1 Trip
VN>2 Trip
100
Any Start
F>2 Trip
V<1 Trip
101
VN>1 Start
Power1 Trip
V<1 Trip A/AB
102
VN>2 Start
Power2 Trip
V<1 Trip B/BC
103
V<1 Start
I>1 Trip
V<1 Trip C/CA
104
V<1 Start A/AB
I>1 Trip A
V<2 Trip
105
V<1 Start B/BC
I>1 Trip B
V<2 Trip A/AB
106
V<1 Start C/CA
I>1 Trip C
V<2 Trip B/BC
107
V<2 Start
I>2 Trip
V<2 Trip C/CA
108
V<2 Start A/AB
I>2 Trip A
V>1 Trip
109
V<2 Start B/BC
I>2 Trip B
V>1 Trip A/AB
110
V<2 Start C/CA
I>2 Trip C
V>1 Trip B/BC
111
V>1 Start
Any Start
V>1 Trip C/CA
112
V>1 Start A/AB
VN>1 Start
V>2 Trip
113
V>1 Start B/BC
VN>2 Start
V>2 Trip A/AB
114
V>1 Start C/CA
V<1 Start
V>2 Trip B/BC
115
V>2 Start
V<1 Start A/AB
V>2 Trip C/CA
116
V>2 Start A/AB
V<1 Start B/BC
F<1 Trip
117
V>2 Start B/BC
V<1 Start C/CA
F<2 Trip
118
V>2 Start C/CA
V<2 Start
F<3 Trip
119
Power1 Start
V<2 Start A/AB
F<4 Trip
120
Power2 Start
V<2 Start B/BC
F>1 Trip
121
I>1 Start
V<2 Start C/CA
F>2 Trip
122
I>1 Start A
V>1 Start
Power1 Trip
123
I>1 Start B
V>1 Start A/AB
Power2 Trip
124
I>1 Start C
V>1 Start B/BC
I>1 Trip
125
I>2 Start
V>1 Start C/CA
I>1 Trip A
126
I>2 Start A
V>2 Start
I>1 Trip B
127
I>2 Start B
V>2 Start A/AB
I>1 Trip C
128
I>2 Start C
V>2 Start B/BC
I>2 Trip
129
I>3 Start
V>2 Start C/CA
I>2 Trip A
130
I>3 Start A
Power1 Start
I>2 Trip B
131
I>3 Start B
Power2 Start
I>2 Trip C
132
I>3 Start C
I>1 Start
Any Start
133
I>4 Start
I>1 Start A
VN>1 Start
134
I>4 Start A
I>1 Start B
VN>2 Start
135
I>4 Start B
I>1 Start C
V<1 Start
136
I>4 Start C
I>2 Start
V<1 Start A/AB
137
IN>1 Start
I>2 Start A
V<1 Start B/BC
138
IN>2 Start
I>2 Start B
V<1 Start C/CA
139
IN>3 Start
I>2 Start C
V<2 Start
140
IN>4 Start
IN>1 Start
V<2 Start A/AB
141
ISEF>1 Start
IN>2 Start
V<2 Start B/BC
142
ISEF>2 Start
ISEF>1 Start
V<2 Start C/CA
143
ISEF>3 Start
F<1 Start
V>1 Start
144
ISEF>4 Start
F<2 Start
V>1 Start A/AB
145
F<1 Start
F<3 Start
V>1 Start B/BC
146
F<2 Start
F<4 Start
V>1 Start C/CA
147
F<3 Start
F>1 Start
V>2 Start
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 53 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
148
F<4 Start
F>2 Start
V>2 Start A/AB
149
F>1 Start
VTS Fast Block
V>2 Start B/BC
150
F>2 Start
VTS Slow Block
V>2 Start C/CA
151
VTS Fast Block
CTS Block
Power1 Start
152
VTS Slow Block
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
Power2 Start
153
CTS Block
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
I>1 Start
154
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
IA< Start
I>1 Start A
155
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
IB< Start
I>1 Start B
156
Control Trip
IC< Start
I>1 Start C
157
Control Close
ISEF< Start
I>2 Start
158
Close in Prog
IN< Start
I>2 Start A
159
Reconnection
V/Hz Start
I>2 Start B
160
I> BlockStart
FFail1 Start
I>2 Start C
161
IN/SEF>Blk Start
FFail2 Start
IN>1 Start
162
df/dt Start
Sys Back Start
IN>2 Start
163
IA< Start
Sys Back Start A
ISEF>1 Start
164
IB< Start
Sys Back Start B
100% ST EF Start
165
IC< Start
Sys Back Start C
F<1 Start
166
ISEF< Start
RTD 1 Alarm
F<2 Start
167
Lockout Alarm
RTD 2 Alarm
F<3 Start
168
CB Open 3 ph
RTD 3 Alarm
F<4 Start
169
CB Closed 3 ph
RTD 4 Alarm
F>1 Start
170
Field Volts Fail
RTD 5 Alarm
F>2 Start
171
RTD 6 Alarm
VTS Fast Block
172
RTD 7 Alarm
VTS Slow Block
173
RTD 8 Alarm
CTS Block
174
RTD 9 Alarm
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
175
RTD 10 Alarm
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
176
Lockout Alarm
IA< Start
177
CB Open 3 ph
IB< Start
178
CB Closed 3 ph
IC< Start
179
Field Volts Fail
ISEF< Start
180
IN< Start
181
V/Hz Start
182
FFail1 Start
183
FFail2 Start
184
Sys Back Start
185
Sys Back Start A
186
Sys Back Start B
187
Sys Back Start C
188
RTD 1 Alarm
189
RTD 2 Alarm
190
RTD 3 Alarm
191
RTD 4 Alarm
192
RTD 5 Alarm
193
RTD 6 Alarm
194
RTD 7 Alarm
195
RTD 8 Alarm
196
RTD 9 Alarm
197
RTD 10 Alarm
198
Lockout Alarm
199
CB Open 3 ph
200
CB Closed 3 ph
201
Field Volts Fail
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G34
DESCRIPTION
TRIGGER MODE
Single
Extended
G35
Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers)

Number of steps from minimum value
expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G37
ENABLED / DISABLED
0
Disabled
Enabled
G38
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE

0
9600 bits/s
19200 bits/s
38400 bits/s
G39
COMMUNICATIONS PARITY
0
Odd
Even
None
G43
IDMT CURVE TYPE

0
Disabled
DT
IEC S Inverse
IEC V Inverse
IEC E Inverse
UK LT Inverse
IEEE M Inverse
IEEE V Inverse
IEEE E Inverse
US Inverse
10
US ST Inverse
G44
DIRECTION
0
Non-Directional
Directional Fwd
Directional Rev
G46
POLARISATION
0
Zero Sequence
Neg Sequence
G47
MEASURING MODE
0
Phase-Phase
Phase-Neutral
G48
OPERATION MODE
0
Any Phase
Three Phase
G49
VN OR IN INPUT
0
Measured
Derived
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 54 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G50
DESCRIPTION
RTD SELECT
0x0001
RTD Input 1
0x0002
RTD Input 2
0x0004
RTD Input 3
0x0008
RTD Input 4
0x0010
RTD Input 5
0x0020
RTD Input 6
0x0040
RTD Input 7
0x0080
RTD Input 8
0x0100
RTD Input 9
0x0200
RTD Input 10
G52
DEFAULT DISPLAY
0
3Ph + N Current
3Ph Voltage
Power
Date and Time
Description
Plant Reference
Frequency
Access Level
G53
SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS

0
No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
G54
SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS

0
Primary
Secondary
G55
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL

0
No Operation
Trip
Close
G56
PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE

0
VA
VB
VC
IA
IB
IC
G57
Data Transfer Domain

0
PSL Settings
PSL Configuration
G58
SEF/REF SELECTION
0
SEF
Wattmetric
Hi Z REF
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 55 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 56 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
Lo Z REF
P342 and P343 only
Lo Z REF+SEF
P342 and P343 only
Lo Z REF+Wattmet
P342 and P343 only
G59
BATTERY STATUS
0
Dead
Healthy
G60
Time Delay Selection

0
DT
Inverse
G61
ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL

0
Select via Menu
Select via Opto
G62
SAVE AS
0
No Operation
Save
Abort
G63
IN> FUNCTION LINK
Bit 0
IN>1 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 1
IN>2 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 2
IN>3 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 3
IN>4 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
G64
ISEF> FUNCTION LINK
Bit 0
ISEF>1 VTS Block
Bit 1
ISEF>2 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 2
ISEF>3 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 3
ISEF>4 VTS Block
P341 only
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
G65
F< FUNCTION LINK

Bit 0
F<1 Poledead Blk
Bit 1
F<2 Poledead Blk
Bit 2
F<3 Poledead Blk
Bit 3
F<4 Poledead Blk
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
G66
MESSAGE FORMAT
0
No Trigger
Trigger L/H
Trigger H/L
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G68
DESCRIPTION
CB Fail Reset Options
I< Only
CB Open & I<
Prot Reset & I<
G69
VTS RESET MODE

0
Manual
Auto
G71
PROTOCOL
0
Courier
IEC870-5-103
Modbus
G76
TRANSFER MODE
0
Prepare Rx
Complete Rx
Prepare Tx
Complete Tx
Rx Prepared
Tx Prepared
OK
Error
G79
CUSTOM SETTINGS
0
Disabled
Basic
Complete
G80
VISIBLE / INVISIBLE
0
Invisible
Visible
G81
RESET LOCKOUT BY
0
G84
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 57 of 87
User Interface
CB Close
Modbus value+bit position
START ELEMENTS 1

0x0000,0x0001
General Start
0x0000,0x0002
Start Power1
0x0000,0x0004
Start Power2
0x0000,0x0008
Start FFail1
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0010
Start FFail2
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0020
Start Sys Back
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0040
Start I>1
0x0000,0x0080
Start I>2
0x0000,0x0100
Start I>3
P341 only
0x0000,0x0200
Start I>4
P341 only
0x0000,0x0400
Start IN>1
0x0000,0x0800
Start IN>2
0x0000,0x1000
Start IN>3
P341 only
0x0000,0x2000
Start IN>4
P341 only
0x0000,0x4000
Start ISEF>1
0x0000,0x8000
Start ISEF>2
P341 only
0x0001,0x0000
Start ISEF>3
P341 only
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
0x0002,0x0000
Start ISEF>4
0x0004,0x0000
Start NVD VN>1
0x0008,0x0000
Start NVD VN>2
0x0010,0x0000
Start 100% ST EF
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 58 of 87
P341 only
P343 only
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G85
TRIP ELEMENTS 1

0x0000,0x0001
Any Trip
0x0000,0x0002
Trip Gen Diff
0x0000,0x0004
Trip Power1
0x0000,0x0008
Trip Power2
0x0000,0x0010
Trip FFail1
0x0000,0x0020
Trip FFail2
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0040
Trip NPS
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0080
Trip Sys Back
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0100
Trip I>1
0x0000,0x0200
Trip I>2
0x0000,0x0400
Trip I>3
P431 only
0x0000,0x0800
Trip I>4
P431 only
0x0000,0x1000
Trip IN>1
0x0000,0x2000
Trip IN>2
0x0000,0x4000
Trip IN>3
P431 only
0x0000,0x8000
Trip IN>4
P431 only
0x0001,0x0000
Trip ISEF>1
0x0002,0x0000
Trip ISEF>2
P431 only
0x0004,0x0000
Trip ISEF>3
P431 only
0x0008,0x0000
Trip ISEF>4
P431 only
0x0010,0x0000
Trip IREF>
0x0020,0x0000
Trip NVD VN>1
0x0040,0x0000
Trip NVD VN>2
0x0080,0x0000
Trip 100% ST EF
P343 only
0x0100,0x0000
Trip Dead Mach
P343 only
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G86
Bit Description
TRIP ELEMENTS 2

0x0000,0x0001
Trip V<1
0x0000,0x0002
Trip V<2
P343 only
P342 and P343 only
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 59 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
0x0000,0x0004
Trip V< A/AB
0x0000,0x0008
Trip V< B/BC
0x0000,0x0010
Trip V< C/CA
0x0000,0x0020
Trip V>1
0x0000,0x0040
Trip V>2
0x0000,0x0080
Trip V> A/AB
0x0000,0x0100
Trip V> B/BC
0x0000,0x0200
Trip V> C/CA
0x0000,0x0400
Trip F<1
0x0000,0x0800
Trip F<2
0x0000,0x1000
Trip F<3
0x0000,0x2000
Trip F<4
0x0000,0x4000
Trip F>1
0x0000,0x8000
Trip F>2
0x0001,0x0000
Trip V/Hz
P342 and P343 only
0x0002,0x0000
Trip df/dt
P341 only
0x0004,0x0000
Trip V Shift
P341 only
0x0008,0x0000
Trip RTD 1
P342 and P343 only
0x0010,0x0000
Trip RTD 2
P342 and P343 only
0x0020,0x0000
Trip RTD 3
P342 and P343 only
0x0040,0x0000
Trip RTD 4
P342 and P343 only
0x0080,0x0000
Trip RTD 5
P342 and P343 only
0x0100,0x0000
Trip RTD 6
P342 and P343 only
0x0200,0x0000
Trip RTD 7
P342 and P343 only
0x0400,0x0000
Trip RTD 8
P342 and P343 only
0x0800,0x0000
Trip RTD 9
P342 and P343 only
0x1000,0x0000
Trip RTD 10
P342 and P343 only
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G87
Bit Description
FAULT ALARMS

0x0000,0x0001
CB Fail 1
0x0000,0x0002
CB Fail 2
0x0000,0x0004
VTS
0x0000,0x0008
CTS
0x0000,0x0010
Alarm FFail
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0020
Alarm NPS
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0040
Alarm V/Hz
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0080
Alarm RTD 1
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0100
Alarm RTD 2
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0200
Alarm RTD 3
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0400
Alarm RTD 4
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x0800
Alarm RTD 5
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x1000
Alarm RTD 6
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x2000
Alarm RTD 7
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x4000
Alarm RTD 8
P342 and P343 only
0x0000,0x8000
Alarm RTD 9
P342 and P343 only
0x0001,0x0000
Alarm RTD 10
P342 and P343 only
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G88
ALARMS
0
Alarm Disabled
Alarm Enabled
G90
GROUP SELECTION
0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
G93
COMMISSION TEST
0
No Operation
Apply Test
Remove Test
G94
COMMISSION TEST
0
No Operation
Apply Test
G95
G96
SYSTEM FUNCTION LINKS

Bit 0
Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset)
Bit 1
Not Used
Bit 2
Not Used
Bit 3
Not used
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
Bit Position
ALARM INDEXED STRINGS
Battery Fail
Field Volt Fail
SG-opto Invalid
Protn Disabled
VT Fail Alarm
CTS Fail Alarm
CB Fail
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Lockout
CB OPs Maint
10
CB OPs Lock
11
CB Time Maint
12
CB Time Lockout
13
Fault Freq Lock
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 60 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 61 of 87
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
14
CB Status Alarm
15
CB Trip Fail
P341 only
16
CB Close Fail
P341 only
17
Man CB Unhealthy
P341 only
18
F out of Range
P341 only
18
NPS Alarm
P342 and P343 only
19
V/Hz Alarm
P342 and P343 only
20
Field Fail Alarm
P342 and P343 only
21
RTD Thermal Alm
P342 and P343 only
22
RTD Open Cct
P342 and P343 only
23
RTD short Cct
P342 and P343 only
24
RTD Data Error
P342 and P343 only
25
RTD Board Fail
P342 and P343 only
26
Freq Prot Alm
27
Voltage Prot Alm
28
User Alarm 1
29
User Alarm 2
30
User Alarm 3
31
User Alarm 4
G98
COPY TO
0
No Operation
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
G99
CB CONTROL
0
Disabled
Local
Remote
Local+Remote
Opto
Opto+local
Opto+Remote
Opto+Rem+local
Disabled
Percentage Bias
High Impedance
Disabled
Reverse
Low Forward
Over
Disabled
Underimpedance
Volt controlled
Volt restrained
G101
GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION SELECT
G102
POWER FUNCTION SELECT
G103
SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G104
DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION
None
Delta-Star
Disabled
DT
START ELEMENTS 2
G105
G107
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 62 of 87
DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION

0x0000,0x0001
Start V<1
0x0000,0x0002
Start V<2
0x0000,0x0004
Start V< A/AB
0x0000,0x0008
Start V< B/BC
0x0000,0x0010
Start V< C/CA
0x0000,0x0020
Start V>1
0x0000,0x0040
Start V>2
0x0000,0x0080
Start V> A/AB
0x0000,0x0100
Start V> B/BC
0x0000,0x0200
Start V> C/CA
0x0000,0x0400
Start F<1
0x0000,0x0800
Start F<2
0x0000,0x1000
Start F<3
0x0000,0x2000
Start F<4
0x0000,0x4000
Start F>1
0x0000,0x8000
Start F>2
0x0001,0x0000
Start V/Hz
P342 and P343 only
0x0002,0x0000
Start df/dt
P341 only
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G108
Bit position
RTD OPEN CIRCUIT FLAGS
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
RTD 10 label
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G109
Bit position
RTD SHORT CIRCUIT FLAGS
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
RTD 10 label
G110
DESCRIPTION
Bit position
RTD DATA ERROR
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
RTD 10 label
DT
IEC S Inverse
IEC V Inverse
IEC E Inverse
UK LT Inverse
IEEE M Inverse
IEEE V Inverse
IEEE E Inverse
US Inverse
US ST Inverse
None
52A
52B
G111
IDMT CURVE TYPE
G118
CB CONTROL LOGIC INPUT ASSIGNMENTS
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 63 of 87
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 64 of 87
EVENT RECORD DATA FORMAT

Event Text
16 Chars
Additional Event Description

Text
Logic Inputs
Change in Opto Input
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
0020
P341
P342
P343
Value
Value contains new opto input status

Output Contacts
Change in output contact status
0021

Value contains new output contact status
Alarm Events:
Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF
Battery Fail
ON/OFF
Battery Fail
2/3
0022
Field Volt Fail
ON/OFF
Field Voltage Fail
2/3
0022
SG-opto Invalid
ON/OFF
Setting Group via opto invalid
2/3
0022
Protn Disabled
ON/OFF
Protection Disabled
2/3
0022
VT Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
VTS Alarm
2/3
0022
CT Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
CTS Alarm
2/3
0022
CB Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
CB Trip Fail Protection
0/1
0022
I^ Maint Alarm
ON/OFF
Broken Current Maintenance Alarm
2/3
0022
I^ Lockout Alarm
ON/OFF
Broken Current Lockout Alarm
2/3
0022
CB Ops Maint
ON/OFF
No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm
2/3
0022
10
CB Ops Lockout
ON/OFF
No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout
2/3
0022
11
*
*
CB Op Time Maint
ON/OFF
CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm
2/3
0022
12
CB Op Time Lock
ON/OFF
CB Op Time Lockout Alarm
2/3
0022
13
Fault Freq Lock
ON/OFF
Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm
2/3
0022
14
CB Status Alarm
ON/OFF
CB Status Alarm
0/1
0022
15
Man CB Trip Fail
ON/OFF
CB Failed to Trip
0/1
0022
16
Man CB Cls Fail
ON/OFF
CB Failed to Close
0/1
0022
17
Man CB Unhealthy
ON/OFF
No Healthy Control Close
0/1
0023
18
F out of range
ON/OFF
2/3
0022
19
NPS Alarm
ON/OFF
Negative Phase Sequence Alarm
0/1
0022
19
V/Hz Alarm
ON/OFF
Volts Per Hz Alarm
0/1
0022
20
Field Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
Field failure Alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
21
RTD Thermal Alm
ON/OFF
RTD thermal Alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
22
RTD Open Cct
ON/OFF
RTD open circuit failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
23
RTD short Cct
ON/OFF
RTD short circuit failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
24
RTD Data Error
ON/OFF
RTD data inconsistency error (Latched)
0/1
0022
25
RTD Board Fail
ON/OFF
RTD Board failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
26
Freq Prot Alm
ON/OFF
User definable frequency protection alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
27
Voltage Prot Alm
ON/OFF
User definable voltage protection alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
28
User Alarm 1
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 1 (Latched)
0/1
0022
29
User Alarm 2
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 2 (Latched)
0/1
0022
30
User Alarm 3
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset)
2/3
0022
31
User Alarm 4
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset)
2/3
0022
32
Protection Events:
Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF
100% ST EF Trip
ON/OFF
100% Stator Earth Fault Trip
0023
178
DeadMachine trip
ON/OFF
Dead machine protection Trip
0023
179
Gen Diff Trip
ON/OFF
Generator Differential trip 3ph
0023
180
Gen Diff Trip A
ON/OFF
Generator Differential Trip A
0023
181
Gen Diff Trip B
ON/OFF
Generator Differential Trip B
0023
182
Gen Diff Trip C
ON/OFF
Generator Differential Trip C
0023
183
Field Fail1 Trip
ON/OFF
Field failure Stage 1 start
0023
184
Field Fail2 Trip
ON/OFF
0023
185
NPS Trip
ON/OFF
Negative Phase Sequence Trip
0023
186
Sys Back Trip
ON/OFF
System Backup Trip 3ph
0023
187
Sys Back Trip A
ON/OFF
System Backup Trip A
0023
188
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Event Text
16 Chars
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 65 of 87

Text
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
P341
P342
P343
Sys Back Trip B
ON/OFF
System Backup Trip B
0023
Sys Back Trip C
ON/OFF
System Backup Trip C
0023
189
190
V/Hz Trip
ON/OFF
Volts per Hz Trip
0023
191
RTD 1 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 1 TRIP
RTD 2 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 2 TRIP
0023
192
0023
193
RTD 3 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 3 TRIP
0023
194
RTD 4 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 4 TRIP
0023
195
RTD 5 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 5 TRIP
0023
196
RTD 6 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 6 TRIP
0023
197
RTD 7 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 7 TRIP
0023
198
RTD 8 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 8 TRIP
0023
199
RTD 9 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 9 TRIP
0023
200
RTD 10 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 10 TRIP
0023
201
df/dt Trip
ON/OFF
Rate of change of frequency Trip
0023
202
Any RTD Trip
ON/OFF
Any RTD Trip
0023
202
V Shift Trip
ON/OFF
Voltage vector shift trip
0023
203
IN>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage EF Trip
0023
204
IN>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage EF Trip
0023
205
IN>3 Trip
ON/OFF
3rd Stage EF Trip
0023
206
IN>4 Trip
ON/OFF
4th Stage EF Trip
0023
207
IREF> Trip
ON/OFF
REF Trip
0023
208
ISEF>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage SEF Trip
0023
209
ISEF>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage SEF Trip
0023
210
ISEF>3 Trip
ON/OFF
3rd Stage SEF Trip
0023
211
ISEF>4 Trip
ON/OFF
4th Stage SEF Trip
0023
212
VN>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage Residual O/V Trip
0023
213
VN>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip
0023
214
V<1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
0023
215
V<1 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
0023
216
V<1 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
0023
217
V<1 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
0023
218
V<2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
0023
219
V<2 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
0023
220
V<2 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
0023
221
V<2 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
0023
222
V>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
0023
223
V>1 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
0023
224
V>1 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
0023
225
V>1 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
0023
226
V>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
0023
227
V>2 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
0023
228
V>2 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
0023
229
V>2 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
0023
230
F<1 Trip
ON/OFF
Under frequency Stage 1 trip
0023
231
F<2 Trip
ON/OFF
0023
232
F<3 Trip
ON/OFF
0023
233
F<4 Trip
ON/OFF
0023
234
F>1 Trip
ON/OFF
Over frequency Stage 1 Trip
0023
235
F>2 Trip
ON/OFF
0023
236
Power1 Trip
ON/OFF
Power stage 1 trip
0023
237
Power2 Trip
ON/OFF
Power stage 2 trip
0023
238
I>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph
0023
239
I>1 Trip A
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Trip A
0023
240
I>1 Trip B
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Trip B
0023
241
I>1 Trip C
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Trip C
0023
242
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Event Text
16 Chars

Text
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 66 of 87
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
P341
P342
P343
Value
I>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
0023
243
I>2 Trip A
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Trip A
0023
244
I>2 Trip B
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Trip B
0023
245
I>2 Trip C
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Trip C
0023
246
I>3 Trip
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
0023
247
I>3 Trip A
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Trip A
0023
248
I>3 Trip B
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Trip B
0023
249
*
*
I>3 Trip C
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Trip C
0023
250
I>4 Trip
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph
0023
251
I>4 Trip A
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Trip A
0023
252
*
*
I>4 Trip B
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Trip B
0023
253
I>4 Trip C
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Trip C
0023
254
Any Start
ON/OFF
Any Start
0023
255
VN>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage Residual O/V Start
0023
256
VN>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Residual O/V Start
0023
257
V<1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
0023
258
V<1 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
0023
259
V<1 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
0023
260
V<1 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
0023
261
V<2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
0023
262
V<2 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
0023
263
V<2 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
0023
264
V<2 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
0023
265
V>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
0023
266
V>1 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
0023
267
V>1 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
0023
268
V>1 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
0023
269
V>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
0023
270
V>2 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
0023
271
V>2 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
0023
272
V>2 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
0023
273
Power1 Start
ON/OFF
Power Stage 1 start
0023
274
Power2 Start
ON/OFF
Power stage 1 start
0023
275
I>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Start 3ph
0023
276
I>1 Start A
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Start A
0023
277
I>1 Start B
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Start B
0023
278
I>1 Start C
ON/OFF
1st Stage O/C Start C
0023
279
I>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph
0023
280
I>2 Start A
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Start A
0023
281
I>2 Start B
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Start B
0023
282
I>2 Start C
ON/OFF
2nd Stage O/C Start C
0023
283
I>3 Start
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph
0023
284
I>3 Start A
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Start A
0023
285
I>3 Start B
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Start B
0023
286
I>3 Start C
ON/OFF
3rd Stage O/C Start C
0023
287
I>4 Start
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Start 3ph
0023
288
I>4 Start A
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Start A
0023
289
I>4 Start B
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Start B
0023
290
I>4 Start C
ON/OFF
4th Stage O/C Start C
0023
291
IN>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage EF#1 Start
0023
292
IN>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage EF#1 Start
0023
293
IN>3 Start
ON/OFF
3rd Stage EF#1 Start
0023
294
IN>4 Start
ON/OFF
4th Stage EF#1 Start
0023
295
ISEF>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage SEF Start
0023
296
ISEF>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage SEF Start
0023
297
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 67 of 87
Event Text
16 Chars

Text
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
P341
P342
P343
ISEF>3 Start
ON/OFF
3rd Stage SEF Start
0023
298
ISEF>4 Start
ON/OFF
4th Stage SEF Start
0023
299
100% ST EF Start
ON/OFF
100% Stator Earth Fault Start
0023
300
F<1 Start
ON/OFF
Under frequency Stage 1 START
0023
301
F<2 Start
ON/OFF
0023
302
F<3 Start
ON/OFF
0023
303
F<4 Start
ON/OFF
0023
304
F>1 Start
ON/OFF
Over frequency Stage 1 START
0023
305
F>2 Start
ON/OFF
0023
306
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ON/OFF
tBF1 Trip 3Ph
0023
310
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
ON/OFF
tBF2 Trip 3Ph
0023
311
Control Trip
ON/OFF
Control Trip
0023
312
Control Close
ON/OFF
Control Close
0023
313
Close in Prog
ON/OFF
Control Close in Progress
0023
314
df/dt Start
ON/OFF
Rate of change of frequency Start
0023
318
V/Hz Start
ON/OFF
Volts per Hz Start
0023
324
FFail1 Start
ON/OFF
0023
325
FFail2 Start
ON/OFF
0023
326
Sys Back Start
ON/OFF
System Backup Start 3Ph
0023
327
Sys Back Start A
ON/OFF
System Backup Start A
0023
328
Sys Back Start B
ON/OFF
System Backup Start B
0023
329
Sys Back Start C
ON/OFF
System Backup Start C
0023
330
RTD 1 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 1 Alarm
0023
331
RTD 2 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 2 Alarm
0023
332
RTD 3 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 3 Alarm
0023
333
RTD 4 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 4 Alarm
0023
334
RTD 5 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 5 Alarm
0023
335
RTD 6 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 6 Alarm
0023
336
RTD 7 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 7 Alarm
0023
337
RTD 8 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 8 Alarm
0023
338
RTD 9 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 9 Alarm
0023
339
RTD 10 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 10 Alarm
0023
340
CB Open 3 ph
ON/OFF
3 ph CB Open
0023
342
CB Closed 3 ph
ON/OFF
3 ph CB Closed
0023
343
General Events
Alarms Cleared
Relay Alarms Cleared
FFFF
Events Cleared
Relay Event Records Cleared
0B01
Faults Cleared
Relay Fault Records Cleared
0B02
Maint Cleared
Relay Maintenance Records Cleared
0B03
PW Unlocked UI
Control and Support Settings Changed
0002
PW Invalid UI
Disturbance Recorder Settings Changed
0002
PW1 Modified UI
Change to Protection Setting Group 1
0002
PW2 Modified UI
0002
PW Expired UI
0002
PW Unlocked F
0002
PW Invalid F
Active Group Selection Changed
0002
10
PW1 Modified F
Password Unlocked via User Interface
0002
11
PW2 Modified F
Invalid Password entered on User Interface
0002
12
PW Expired F
Password unlock expired User Interface
0002
13
PW Unlocked R
Password Unlocked via Front Port
0002
14
PW Invalid R
Invalid Password entered on Front Port
0002
15
PW1 Modified R
Password unlock expired Front Port
0002
16
PW2 Modified R
Password Unlocked via Rear Port
0002
17
PW Expired R
Invalid Password entered on Rear Port
0002
18
IRIG-B Active
Password unlock expired Rear Port
0805
19
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
Event Text
16 Chars

Text
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 68 of 87
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
P341
P342
P343
IRIG-B Inactive
Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface
0805
20
Time Synch
Password Level 1 Modified on Front Port
0801
21
C&S Changed
FFFF
22
Dist Changed
0904
23
Group 1 Changed
Password Level 2 Modified on Front Port
0904
24
Group 2 Changed
0904
25
Group 3 Changed
IRIG-B Timesync Active (Valid Signal)
0904
26
Group 4 Changed
IRIG-B Timesync Inactive (No Signal)
0904
27
Act Grp Changed
Relay Clock Adjusted
0903
28
Indication Reset
Relay Indications Reset
01FF
29
Power On
Relay Powered Up
FFFF
30
Cell Ref
Value
Extraction Column
Fault Recorded
Fault Records:
0100
B000
16bit UINT
Text
Self Monitoring:
Cell Ref
Value
Extraction Column
Record Number
Maint Recorded
Maintenance Records
FFFF
B100
16bit UINT
Record Number
Maintenance Record Text:
Description
Fast WDog Error
Fast Watchdog Error
Continuous
*
Battery Failure
Battery Failure
BBRAM Failure
Battery Back RAM Failure
Field Volt Fail
Field Voltage Failure
Bus Reset Error
Bus Error
Slow WDog Error
Slow Watchdog Error
SRAM Failure Bus
SRAM Bus Failure
SRAM Failure Blk
SRAM Block Failure
FLASH Failure
Code Verify Fail
Flash checksum Error
Software Code Verification Failure
EEPROM Failure
EEPROM Failure
Software Failure
Software Error
Hard Verify Fail
Hardware Verification Error
Non Standard
General Error
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 69 of 87
Compatability Level 2
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads 1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface (Order option)

Plastic Fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
Transmission speed
User Setting: 9600 or 19200
Application Layer
More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
Standard information numbers in monitor direction
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
GI
Model Number
P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
System Functions(Monitor)
8
10
255 0
End of General Interrogration
255 0
Time Syncronisation
224 2
Reset FCB
224 3
Reset CU
224 4
Start/Restart
224 5
Power On
Reset Indication
Protection Disabled
Note 1: Indenfication message in ASDU 5: ALSTOM, Software ref P34x.

Note 2: The Function type is a settable quantity.
Status Indications
1
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
16
Auto-recloser active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
17
Tele-protection active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
18
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
224 19
9,11
20
9,11
224 21
9,11
22
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
224 23
Characteristic 1
Group 1 Active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
224 24
Characteristic 2
Group 2 Active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
224 25
Characteristic 3
Group 3 Active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21
224 26
Characteristic 4
Group 4 Active
1,7,9,11
224 27
Auxillary input 1
Opto Input 1
1,7,9,11
224 28
Auxillary input 2
Opto Input 2
1,7,9,11
224 29
Auxillary input 3
Opto Input 3
1,7,9,11
224 30
Auxillary input 4
Opto Input 4
1,7,9,11
224 27
Auxillary input 1
Opto Input 5
1,7,9,11
224 28
Auxillary input 2
Opto Input 6
1,7,9,11
224 29
Auxillary input 3
Opto Input 7
1,7,9,11
224 30
Auxillary input 4
Opto Input 8
1,7,9,11
224 27
Auxillary input 1
Opto Input 9
1,7,9,11
224 28
Auxillary input 2
Opto Input 10
1,7,9,11
224 29
Auxillary input 3
Opto Input 11
1,7,9,11
224 30
Auxillary input 4
Opto Input 12
1,7,9,11
224 27
Auxillary input 1
Opto Input 13
1,7,9,11
224 28
Auxillary input 2
Opto Input 14
1,7,9,11
224 29
Auxillary input 3
Opto Input 15
1,7,9,11
224 30
Auxillary input 4
Opto Input 16
Protection active
LED Reset
Monitor direction blocked
Test mode
Local parameter setting
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 70 of 87
GI
Model Number
P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
Supervision Indications
1
1,7,9
32
Measurand supervision I
1,7,9
33
Measurand supervision V
1,7,9
35
Phase sequence supervision
1,7,9
36
Trip circuit supervision
1,7,9
37
I>> back-up supervision
1,7,9
224 38
1,7,9
39
Teleprotection disturbed
1,7,9
46
Group warning
1,7,9
47
Group alarm
VT fuse failure
VT Supervision Indication
Earth Fault Indications

1
1,7,9
48
Earth Fault L1
1,7,9
49
Earth Fault L2
1,7,9
50
Earth Fault L3
1,7,9
51
Earth Fault Fwd
1,7,9
52
Earth Fault Rev
Fault Indications
1,7,9
224 64
Start /pickup L1
I>1 A Phase Start
1,7,9
224 65
Start /pickup L2
I>1 B Phase Start
1,7,9
224 66
Start /pickup L3
I>1 C Phase Start
1,7,9
224 64
Start /pickup L1
I>2 A Phase Start
1,7,9
224 65
Start /pickup L2
I>2 B Phase Start
1,7,9
224 66
Start /pickup L3
I>2 C Phase Start
1,7,9
224 64
Start /pickup L1
I>3 A Phase Start
1,7,9
224 65
Start /pickup L2
I>3 B Phase Start
1,7,9
224 66
Start /pickup L3
I>3 C Phase Start
1,7,9
224 64
Start /pickup L1
I>4 A Phase Start
1,7,9
224 65
Start /pickup L2
I>4 B Phase Start
1,7,9
224 66
Start /pickup L3
I>4 C Phase Start
1,7,9
224 64
Start /pickup L1
Ssytem Backup A Phase Start
1,7,9
224 65
Start /pickup L2
Ssytem Backup B Phase Start
1,7,9
224 66
Start /pickup L3
Ssytem Backup C Phase Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
IN>1 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
IN>2 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
IN>3 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
IN>4 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
ISEF>1 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
ISEF>2 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
ISEF>3 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
ISEF>4 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
VN>1 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
VN>2 Start
1,7,9
224 67
Start /pickup N
10
100% Stator Earth fault Start
1,7
224 68
General Trip
Any Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
System Backup trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
V<1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
V<2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
V>1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
V>2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
F<1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
F<2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
F<3 Trip
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 71 of 87
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
GI
Model Number
P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
1,7
224 68
General Trip
F<4 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
10
F>1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
11
F>2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
12
Power 1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
13
Power 2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
14
Field Failure 1 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
15
Field Failure 2 Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
16
V/Hz Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
17
df/dt Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
18
Voltage Vector Shift Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
1,7
224 68
1,7
224 68
1,7
19
NPS Trip
20
Restrictive Earth Fault Trip
General Trip
21
100% Sator Earth Fault Trip
General Trip
22
Generator Differential Trip
224 68
General Trip
23
Dead Machine Trip
1,7
224 68
General Trip
24
Any RTD Trip
1,7
224 69
Trip L1
I>1 Phase A Trip
1,7
224 70
Trip L2
I>1 Phase B Trip
1,7
224 71
Trip L3
I>1 Phase C Trip
1,7
224 69
Trip L1
I>2 Phase A Trip
1,7
224 70
Trip L2
I>2 Phase B Trip
1,7
224 71
Trip L3
I>2 Phase C Trip
1,7
224 69
Trip L1
I>3 Phase A Trip
1,7
224 70
Trip L2
I>3 Phase B Trip
1,7
224 71
Trip L3
I>3 Phase C Trip
1,7
224 69
Trip L1
I>4 Phase A Trip
1,7
224 70
Trip L2
I>4 Phase B Trip
1,7
224 71
Trip L3
I>4 Phase C Trip
1,7
224 69
Trip L1
System Backup Phase A Trip
1,7
224 70
Trip L2
SysBack Phase B Trip
1,7
224 71
Trip L3
SysBack Phase C Trip
1,7
72
1,7
73
Fault Location in ohms
1,7
74
Fault forward
1,7
75
Fault reverse
1,7
76
Teleprotection signal sent
1,7
77
Teleprotection signal received
1,7
78
Zone 1
1,7
79
Zone 2
1,7
80
Zone 3
1,7
81
Zone 4
1,7
82
Zone 5
1,7
83
Zone 6
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
Any Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
System Backup Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
V<1 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
V<2 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
V>1 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
V>2 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
F<1 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
F<2 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
F<3 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
F<4 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
10
F>1 Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
11
F>2 Start
Trip I>> (back up)
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 72 of 87
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
GI
Model Number
P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
12
Power 1 start
13
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
Power 2 Start
14
1,7,9
224 84
General Start
Field Failure 1 Start
15
1,7,9
224 84
Field Failure 2 Start
General Start
16
V/Hz Start
1,7,9
1,7
224 84
General Start
17
df/dt Start
224 85
Breaker Failure
CB Fail Alarm
1,7
86
Trip measuring system L1
1,7
87
1,7
88
1,7
89
1,7
224 90
Trip I>
I>1 trip
1,7
1,7
224 90
Trip I>
I>2 Trip
224 91
Trip I>>
I>3 Trip
1,7
224 91
Trip I>>
I>2 Trip
1,7
224 91
Trip I>>
I>4 Trip
1,7
224 92
Trip IN>
IN>1 Trip
1,7
224 92
Trip IN>
IN>2 Trip
1,7
224 92
Trip IN>
ISEF>1 Trip
1,7
224 92
Trip IN>
ISEF>2 Trip
1,7
224 92
Trip IN>
VN>1 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
IN>3 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
IN>2 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
IN>4 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
ISEF>1 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
ISEF>3 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
ISEF>4 Trip
1,7
224 93
Trip IN>>
VN>2 Trip
Trip measuring system E
Auto-Reclose Indications (Monitor)

1
1,7
1,7
128 CB on by A/R
129 CB on by long time A/R
1,7,9
130 AR blocked
Measurands (Monitor)
3.1
2,7
144 Measurand I
3.2
2,7
145 Measurands I,V
3.3
2,7
146 Measurands I,V,P,Q
3.4
2,7
147 Measurands IN,VEN
2,7
224 148 Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
Generic Functions(Monitor)
10
42,43
240 Read Headings
10
42,43
241 Read attributes of all entries of a group
10
42,43
243 Read directory of entry
10
1,2,7,9,11,12,42,43
244 Real attribute of entry
10
10
245 End of GGI
10
41,44
249 Write entry with confirm
10
40,41
250 Write entry with execute
10
40
251 Write entry aborted
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 73 of 87
Standard Information numbers in control direction

ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
GI
Model Number
P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
System Functions (Control)

7
0
224
Init General Interrogation
Time Syncronisation
255
General Commands
20
20
16
Auto-recloser on/off
20
20
17
Teleprotection on/off
20
20
18
20
20
224 19
LED Reset
Reset Indications and latches
20
20
224 23
Activate characteristic 1
Group 1 Active
20
20
224 24
Group 2 Active
20
20
224 25
Group 3 Active
20
20
224 26
Group 4 Active
Protection on/off
Generic Functions
21
42
240 Read headings of all defined groups
21
42
241 Read single attribute of all entries of a group
21
42
243 Read directory of single entry
21
42
244 Read attribute of sngle entry
21
245 Generic General Interrogation (GGI)
10
40
248 Write entry
10
40
249 Write with confirm
10
40
250 Write with execute
10
40
251 Write entry abort
* Note the value in this column is added to the station address to produce the common address of the ASDU
Basic Application Functions

Test Mode
Disturbance data
Generic services
Private data
Miscellaneous
Max .MVAL = times rated value
Measurand
1.2
2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Active Power P
Reactive Power Q
Frequency f
Voltage L1-L2
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 74 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P341
P342
P343
Output Condition
Output Relay 1
Output Label 1 (Setting)
Output Condition
Output Relay 2
Output Condition
Output Relay 3
Output Condition
Output Relay 4
Output Condition
Output Relay 5
Output Condition
Output Relay 6
Output Condition
Output Relay 7
Output Condition
Output Relay 8
Output Condition
Output Relay 9
Output Condition
Output Relay 10
10
Output Condition
Output Relay 11
11
Output Condition
Output Relay 12
12
Output Condition
Output Relay 13
13
Output Condition
Output Relay 14
14
Unused
15
Unused
16
Unused
17
Unused
18
Unused
19
Unused
20
Unused
21
Unused
22
Unused
23
Unused
24
Unused
25
Unused
26
Unused
27
Unused
28
Unused
29
Unused
30
Unused
31
Unused
32
Opto
Opto Input 1
Opto Label 1 (setting)
33
Opto
Opto Input 2
34
Opto
Opto Input 3
35
Opto
Opto Input 4
36
Opto
Opto Input 5
37
Opto
Opto Input 6
38
Opto
Opto Input 7
39
Opto
Opto Input 8
40
Opto
Opto Input 9
41
Opto
Opto Input 10
42
Opto
Opto Input 11
43
Opto
Opto Input 12
44
Opto
Opto Input 13
45
Opto
Opto Input 14
46
Opto
Opto Input 15
47
Opto
Opto Input 16
48
Unused
49
Unused
50
Unused
51
Unused
52
Unused
53
Unused
54
Unused
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
DDB No Source
Description
55
Unused
56
Unused
57
Unused
58
Unused
59
Unused
60
Unused
61
Unused
62
Unused
63
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 75 of 87
English Text
P341
P342
P343
Unused
64
Output Condition
Programmable LED 1
LED 1
65
Output Condition
Programmable LED 2
LED 2
66
Output Condition
Programmable LED 3
LED 3
67
Output Condition
Programmable LED 4
LED 4
68
Output Condition
Programmable LED 5
LED 5
69
Output Condition
Programmable LED 6
LED 6
70
Output Condition
Programmable LED 7
LED 7
71
Output Condition
Programmable LED 8
LED 8
72
PSL
Input to Relay Output Condition
Relay 1
73
PSL
Relay 2
74
PSL
Relay 3
75
PSL
Relay 4
76
PSL
Relay 5
77
PSL
Relay 6
78
PSL
Relay 7
79
PSL
Relay 8
80
PSL
Relay 9
81
PSL
Relay 10
82
PSL
Relay 11
83
PSL
Relay 12
84
PSL
Relay 13
85
PSL
Relay 14
86
PSL
Input to LED Output Condition
LED Cond IN 1
87
PSL
LED Cond IN 2
88
PSL
LED Cond IN 3
89
PSL
LED Cond IN 4
90
PSL
LED Cond IN 5
91
PSL
LED Cond IN 6
92
PSL
LED Cond IN 7
93
PSL
LED Cond IN 8
94
PSL
Input to Auxiliary Timer 1
Timer in 1
95
PSL
Timer in 2
96
PSL
Timer in 3
97
PSL
Timer in 4
98
PSL
Timer in 5
99
PSL
Timer in 6
100
PSL
Timer in 7
101
PSL
Timer in 8
102
Auxiliary Timer
Output from Auxiliary Timer 1
Timer out 1
103
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 2
104
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 3
105
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 4
106
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 5
107
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 6
108
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 7
109
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 8
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 76 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P341
P342
P343
110
PSL
Trigger for Fault Recorder
Fault_REC_TRIG
111
Group Selection
Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm
SG-opto Invalid
112
Commission Test
Test Mode Enabled Alarm
Protn Disabled
113
VT Supervision
VTS Indication
VT Fail Alarm
114
CT Supervision
CTS Indication
CT Fail Alarm
115
Breaker Fail
Breaker Fail Any Trip
CB Fail Alarm
116
CB Monitoring
Broken Current Maintenance Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
117
CB Monitoring
Broken Current Lockout Alarm
I^ Lockout Alarm
118
CB Monitoring
No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm
CB Ops Maint
119
CB Monitoring
No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout
CB Ops Lockout
120
CB Monitoring
Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm
CB Op Time Maint
121
CB Monitoring
Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm
CB Op Time Lock
122
CB Monitoring
Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm
Fault Freq Lock
123
CB Status
CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts)
CB Status Alarm
124
CB Control
CB Failed to Trip Alarm
Man CB Trip Fail
125
CB Control
CB Failed to Close Alarm
Man CB Cls Fail
126
CB Control
CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm
Man CB Unhealthy
127
Frequency Tracking
F out of range
127
NPS Thermal
Negative Phase Sequence Alarm
NPS Alarm
128
Overfluxing
Volts Per Hz Alarm
V/Hz Alarm
129
Field Failure
Field failure Alarm
Field Fail Alarm
130
RTD Thermal
RTD thermal Alarm
RTD Thermal Alm
131
RTD Thermal
RTD open circuit failure
RTD Open Cct
132
RTD Thermal
RTD short circuit failure
RTD short Cct
133
RTD Thermal
RTD data inconsistency error
RTD Data Error
134
RTD Thermal
RTD Board failure
RTD Board Fail
135
PSL
Frequency protection alarm
Freq Prot Alm
136
PSL
Voltage protection alarm
Voltage Prot Alm
137
PSL
User settable alarm 1
User Alarm 1
138
PSL
User Alarm 2
139
PSL
User Alarm 3
140
PSL
User Alarm 4
141
PSL
Block System Backup Time Delay
SysBack Timer Bk
142
PSL
Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay
I>1 Timer Block
143
PSL
I>2 Timer Block
144
PSL
I>3 Timer Block
145
PSL
I>4 Timer Block
146
PSL
Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay
IN>1 Timer Block
147
PSL
IN>2 Timer Block
148
PSL
IN>3 Timer Block
149
PSL
IN>4 Timer Block
150
PSL
Block SEF Stage 1 time delay
ISEF>1 Timer Blk
151
PSL
ISEF>2 Timer Blk
152
PSL
ISEF>3 Timer Blk
153
PSL
ISEF>4 Timer Blk
154
PSL
Logic Input Trip CB
Trip CB
155
PSL
Logic Input Close CB
Close CB
156
PSL
Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay
VN>1 Timer Blk
157
PSL
Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay
VN>2 Timer Blk
158
PSL
Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay
V<1 Timer Block
159
PSL
Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay
V<2 Timer Block
160
PSL
Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay
V>1 Timer Block
161
PSL
Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 4 time delay
V>2 Timer Block
162
PSL
Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer
F<1 Timer Block
163
PSL
F<2 Timer Block
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 77 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P341
P342
P343
164
PSL
F<3 Timer Block
165
PSL
F<4 Timer Block
166
PSL
Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer
F>1 Timer Block
167
PSL
Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer
F>2 Timer Block
168
PSL
External Trip 3ph
External Trip 3ph
169
PSL
52-A (3 phase)
CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
170
PSL
52-B (3 phase)
CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
171
PSL
CB Healthy
CB Healthy
172
PSL
MCB/VTS opto
MCB/VTS
173
PSL
Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay
Reset Close Dly
174
PSL
Reset Latched Relays & LEDs
Reset LEDs
175
PSL
Reset Lockout Opto Input
Reset Lockout
176
PSL
Reset CB Maintenance Values
reset All Values
177
PSL
Reset NPS Thermal State
Reset I2 Thermal
178
100% Stator Earth Fault
100% Stator Earth Fault Trip
100% ST EF Trip
179
Dead Machine
Dead machine protection Trip
DeadMachine trip
180
Generator Differential
Generator Differential trip 3ph
Gen Diff Trip
181
Generator Differential Trip A
Gen Diff Trip A
182
Generator Differential Trip B
Gen Diff Trip B
183
Generator Differential Trip C
Gen Diff Trip C
184
Field Failure
Field Fail1 Trip
185
Field Failure
Field Fail2 Trip
186
NPS Thermal
Negative Phase Sequence Trip
NPS Trip
187
System Backup
System Backup Trip 3ph
Sys Back Trip
188
System Backup
System Backup Trip A
Sys Back Trip A
189
System Backup
System Backup Trip B
Sys Back Trip B
190
System Backup
System Backup Trip C
Sys Back Trip C
191
Overfluxing
Volts per Hz Trip
V/Hz Trip
192
RTD Thermal
RTD 1 TRIP
RTD 1 Trip
193
RTD Thermal
RTD 2 TRIP
RTD 2 Trip
194
RTD Thermal
RTD 3 TRIP
RTD 3 Trip
195
RTD Thermal
RTD 4 TRIP
RTD 4 Trip
196
RTD Thermal
RTD 5 TRIP
RTD 5 Trip
197
RTD Thermal
RTD 6 TRIP
RTD 6 Trip
198
RTD Thermal
RTD 7 TRIP
RTD 7 Trip
199
RTD Thermal
RTD 8 TRIP
RTD 8 Trip
200
RTD Thermal
RTD 9 TRIP
RTD 9 Trip
201
RTD Thermal
RTD 10 TRIP
RTD 10 Trip
202
df/ft
Rate of change of frequency Trip
df/dt Trip
202
RTD Thermal
Any RTD Trip
Any RTD Trip
203
Voltage Vector Shift
Voltage vector shift trip
V Shift Trip
204
Earth Fault
1st Stage EF Trip
IN>1 Trip
205
Earth Fault
2nd Stage EF Trip
IN>2 Trip
206
Earth Fault
3rd Stage EF Trip
IN>3 Trip
207
Earth Fault
4th Stage EF Trip
IN>4 Trip
208
Restricted Earth Fault
REF Trip
IREF> Trip
209
Sensitive Earth Fault
1st Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
210
2nd Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>2 Trip
211
3rd Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>3 Trip
212
4th Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>4 Trip
213
Neutral Displacement
1st Stage Residual O/V Trip
VN>1 Trip
214
Neutral Displacement
2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip
VN>2 Trip
215
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
V<1 Trip
216
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
V<1 Trip A/AB
217
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
V<1 Trip B/BC
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 78 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P341
P342
P343
218
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
V<1 Trip C/CA
219
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
V<2 Trip
220
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
V<2 Trip A/AB
221
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
V<2 Trip B/BC
222
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
V<2 Trip C/CA
223
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
V>1 Trip
224
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
V>1 Trip A/AB
225
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
V>1 Trip B/BC
226
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
V>1 Trip C/CA
227
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
V>2 Trip
228
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
V>2 Trip A/AB
229
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
V>2 Trip B/BC
230
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
V>2 Trip C/CA
231
Under Frequency
F<1 Trip
232
Under Frequency
F<2 Trip
233
Under Frequency
F<3 Trip
234
Under Frequency
F<4 Trip
235
Over Frequency
F>1 Trip
236
Over Frequency
F>2 Trip
237
Power
Power stage 1 trip
Power1 Trip
238
Power
Power stage 2 trip
Power2 Trip
239
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph
I>1 Trip
240
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Trip A
I>1 Trip A
241
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Trip B
I>1 Trip B
242
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Trip C
I>1 Trip C
243
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
I>2 Trip
244
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Trip A
I>2 Trip A
245
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Trip B
I>2 Trip B
246
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Trip C
I>2 Trip C
247
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
I>3 Trip
248
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Trip A
I>3 Trip A
249
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Trip B
I>3 Trip B
250
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Trip C
I>3 Trip C
251
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph
I>4 Trip
252
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Trip A
I>4 Trip A
253
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Trip B
I>4 Trip B
254
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Trip C
I>4 Trip C
255
All protection
Any Start
Any Start
256
Neutral displacement
1st Stage Residual O/V Start
VN>1 Start
257
Neutral displacement
2nd Stage Residual O/V Start
VN>2 Start
258
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
V<1 Start
259
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
V<1 Start A/AB
260
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
V<1 Start B/BC
261
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
V<1 Start C/CA
262
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
V<2 Start
263
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
V<2 Start A/AB
264
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
V<2 Start B/BC
265
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
V<2 Start C/CA
266
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
V>1 Start
267
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
V>1 Start A/AB
268
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
V>1 Start B/BC
269
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
V>1 Start C/CA
270
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
V>2 Start
271
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
V>2 Start A/AB
272
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
V>2 Start B/BC
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 79 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P341
P342
273
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
V>2 Start C/CA
274
Power
Power Stage 1 start
Power1 Start
275
Power
Power stage 1 start
Power2 Start
276
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Start 3ph
I>1 Start
277
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Start A
I>1 Start A
278
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Start B
I>1 Start B
279
Over Current
1st Stage O/C Start C
I>1 Start C
280
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph
I>2 Start
281
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Start A
I>2 Start A
282
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Start B
I>2 Start B
283
Over Current
2nd Stage O/C Start C
I>2 Start C
284
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph
I>3 Start
285
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Start A
I>3 Start A
286
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Start B
I>3 Start B
287
Over Current
3rd Stage O/C Start C
I>3 Start C
288
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Start 3ph
I>4 Start
289
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Start A
I>4 Start A
290
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Start B
I>4 Start B
291
Over Current
4th Stage O/C Start C
I>4 Start C
292
Earth Fault
1st Stage EF Start
IN>1 Start
293
Earth Fault
2nd Stage EF Start
IN>2 Start
294
Earth Fault
3rd Stage EF Start
IN>3 Start
295
Earth Fault
4th Stage EF Start
IN>4 Start
296
1st Stage SEF Start
ISEF>1 Start
297
2nd Stage SEF Start
ISEF>2 Start
298
3rd Stage SEF Start
ISEF>3 Start
299
4th Stage SEF Start
ISEF>4 Start
300
100% Stator Earth Fault
100% Stator Earth Fault Start
100% ST EF Start
301
Under Frequency
F<1 Start
302
Under Frequency
F<2 Start
303
Under Frequency
F<3 Start
304
Under Frequency
F<4 Start
305
Over Frequency
F>1 Start
306
Over Frequency
F>2 Start
307
VT Supervision
VTS Fast Block
VTS Fast Block
308
VT Supervision
VTS Slow Block
VTS Slow Block
309
CT Supervision
CTS Block
CTS Block
310
Breaker failure
tBF1 Trip 3Ph
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
311
Breaker failure
tBF2 Trip 3Ph
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
312
CB Control
Control Trip
Control Trip
313
CB Control
Control Close
Control Close
314
CB Control
Control Close in Progress
Close in Prog
315
Reconnection
Reconnection Time Delay Output
Reconnection
316
Over Current
I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail
I> BlockStart
Over Current
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail IN/SEF>Blk Start
P343
*
*
318
df/dt
Rate of change of frequency Start
df/dt Start
319
Under Current
IA< operate
IA< Start
320
Under Current
IB< operate
IB< Start
321
Under Current
IC< operate
IC< Start
322
Under Current
ISEF< operate
ISEF< Start
323
Under Current
IN< operate
IN< Start
324
Overfluxing
Volts per Hz Start
V/Hz Start
325
Field Failure
FFail1 Start
326
Field Failure
FFail2 Start
327
System Backup
System Backup Start 3Ph
Sys Back Start
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 80 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
English Text
P342
P343
328
System Backup
System Backup Start A
Sys Back Start A
329
System Backup
System Backup Start B
Sys Back Start B
330
System Backup
System Backup Start C
Sys Back Start C
331
RTD Thermal
RTD 1 Alarm
RTD 1 Alarm
332
RTD Thermal
RTD 2 Alarm
RTD 2 Alarm
333
RTD Thermal
RTD 3 Alarm
RTD 3 Alarm
334
RTD Thermal
RTD 4 Alarm
RTD 4 Alarm
335
RTD Thermal
RTD 5 Alarm
RTD 5 Alarm
336
RTD Thermal
RTD 6 Alarm
RTD 6 Alarm
337
RTD Thermal
RTD 7 Alarm
RTD 7 Alarm
338
RTD Thermal
RTD 8 Alarm
RTD 8 Alarm
339
RTD Thermal
RTD 9 Alarm
RTD 9 Alarm
340
RTD Thermal
RTD 10 Alarm
RTD 10 Alarm
341
CB Monitoring
Composite lockout alarm
Lockout Alarm
342
CB Status Monitor
3 ph CB Open
CB Open 3 ph
343
CB Status Monitor
3 ph CB Closed
CB Closed 3 ph
344
Field Voltage Monitor
Field Voltage Failure
Field Volts Fail
345
Poledead
All Poles Dead
(Hidden from PSL)
346
Poledead
Any Pole Dead
(Hidden from PSL)
347
Poledead
Phase A Pole Dead
(Hidden from PSL)
348
Poledead
Phase B Pole Dead
(Hidden from PSL)
349
Poledead
Phase C Pole Dead
(Hidden from PSL)
350
VT Supervision
Accelerate Ind
(Hidden from PSL)
351
VT Supervision
Any Voltage Dependent
(Hidden from PSL)
352
VT Supervision
Ia over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
353
VT Supervision
Ib over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
354
VT Supervision
Ic over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
355
VT Supervision
Va over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
356
VT Supervision
Vb over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
357
VT Supervision
Vc over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
358
VT Supervision
I2 over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
359
VT Supervision
V2 over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
360
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ia over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
361
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ib over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
362
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ic over threshold
(Hidden from PSL)
363
CB Failure
CBF current prot SEF stage trip
(Hidden from PSL)
364
CB Failure
CBF non current prot stage trip
(Hidden from PSL)
365
CB Failure
CBF current Prot SEF Trip
(Hidden from PSL)
366
CB Failure
CBF Non Current Prot Trip
(Hidden from PSL)
367
Frequency tracking
Freq High
(Hidden from PSL)
368
Frequency tracking
Freq Low
(Hidden from PSL)
369
Frequency tracking
Freq Not found
(Hidden from PSL)
370
Frequency tracking
Stop Freq Track
(Hidden from PSL)
371
Reconnection
Reconnect LOM (unqualified)
(Hidden from PSL)
372
Reconnection
Reconnect Disable (unqualified)
(Hidden from PSL)
373
Reconnection
Reconnect LOM
(Hidden from PSL)
374
Reconnection
Reconnect Disable
(Hidden from PSL)
375
Unused
376
Unused
377
Unused
378
Unused
379
Unused
380
Unused
381
Unused
382
Unused
P341
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
DDB No Source
Description
383
Unused
384
Unused
385
Unused
386
Unused
387
Unused
388
Unused
389
Unused
390
Unused
391
Unused
392
Unused
393
Unused
394
Unused
395
Unused
396
Unused
397
Unused
398
Unused
399
Unused
400
Unused
401
Unused
402
Unused
403
Unused
404
Unused
405
Unused
406
Unused
407
Unused
408
Unused
409
Unused
410
Unused
411
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 81 of 87
English Text
P341
P342
P343
Unused
412
PSL
PSL Internal Node 1
413
PSL
PSL Internal Node 2
414
PSL
PSL Internal Node 3
415
PSL
PSL Internal Node 4
416
PSL
PSL Internal Node 5
417
PSL
PSL Internal Node 6
418
PSL
PSL Internal Node 7
419
PSL
PSL Internal Node 8
420
PSL
PSL Internal Node 9
421
PSL
PSL Internal Node 10
422
PSL
423
PSL
424
PSL
425
PSL
426
PSL
427
PSL
428
PSL
429
PSL
430
PSL
431
PSL
432
PSL
433
PSL
434
PSL
435
PSL
436
PSL
437
PSL
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 82 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
P341
P342
P343
438
PSL
439
PSL
440
PSL
441
PSL
442
PSL
443
PSL
444
PSL
445
PSL
446
PSL
447
PSL
448
PSL
449
PSL
450
PSL
451
PSL
452
PSL
453
PSL
454
PSL
455
PSL
456
PSL
457
PSL
458
PSL
459
PSL
460
PSL
461
PSL
462
PSL
463
PSL
464
PSL
465
PSL
466
PSL
467
PSL
468
PSL
469
PSL
470
PSL
471
PSL
472
PSL
473
PSL
474
PSL
475
PSL
476
PSL
477
PSL
478
PSL
479
PSL
480
PSL
481
PSL
482
PSL
483
PSL
484
PSL
485
PSL
486
PSL
487
PSL
488
PSL
489
PSL
490
PSL
491
PSL
492
PSL
English Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 83 of 87
DDB No Source
Description
P341
P342
P343
493
PSL
494
PSL
495
PSL
496
PSL
497
PSL
498
PSL
499
PSL
500
PSL
501
PSL
502
PSL
503
PSL
504
PSL
505
PSL
506
PSL
507
PSL
508
PSL
509
PSL
510
PSL
511
PSL
English Text
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 84 of 87
MiCOM P341 Programmable Scheme Logic
Opto Input Mappings

IN>3 Timer Blk
DDB #148
L3 Block IN1>3&4
DDB #034
IN>4 Timer Blk

DDB #149
I>3 Timer Block

DDB #144
L4 Block I>3&4
DDB #035
I>4 Timer Block

DDB #145
L5 Reset
DDB #036
Reset LEDs
DDB #174
L6 Ext. Prot. Trip

DDB #037
Ext. Trip 3ph

DDB #168
L7 52a
DDB #038
CB Aux 3ph (52A)

DDB #169
L8 52b
DDB #039
CB Aux 3ph (52B)

DDB #170
Fault Record Trigger Mapping

R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
Fault REC TRIG

DDB #110
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 85 of 87
Output Relay Mappings
df/dt Trip
DDB #202
V Shift Trip
DDB #203
IN>1 Trip
DDB #204
IN>2 Trip
DDB #205
IN>3 Trip
DDB #206
IN>4 Trip
DDB #207
IREF> Trip
DDB #208
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #209
ISEF>2 Trip
DDB #210
ISEF>3 Trip
DDB #211
ISEF>4 Trip
DDB #212
VN>1 Trip
DDB #213
VN>2 Trip
DDB #214
V<1 Trip
DDB #215
V<2 Trip
DDB #219
V>1 Trip
DDB #223
V>2 Trip
DDB #227
F<1 Trip
DDB #231
F<2 Trip
DDB #232
F<3 Trip
DDB #233
F<4 Trip
DDB #234
F>1 Trip
DDB #235
F>2 Trip
DDB #236
Power1 Trip
DDB #237
Power2 Trip
DDB #238
I>1 Trip
DDB #239
I>2 Trip
DDB #243
I>3 Trip
DDB #247
I>4 Trip
DDB #251
100
Dwell
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 86 of 87
Output Relay Mappings

0
IN/SEF>Blk Start
Straight
DDB #317
R1 IN>1 Start
DDB #000
I>Blk Start
DDB #316
Straight
0
R2 IN>1 Start
DDB #001
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #111
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #113
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #114
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #115
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #116
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #117
CB Ops Maint
DDB #118
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #119
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #120
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #121
0
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
Dwell
500
Fault Freq Lock

DDB #122
CB Status Alarm
DDB #123
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #124
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #125
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #126
F Out of Range
DDB #127
Field volts fail
DDB #344
100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
DDB #310
Dwell
0
R5 CB Fail
DDB #004
0
Control Close
DDB #313
Straight
0
R6 Control Close
DDB #005
0
Control Trip
DDB #312
Straight
0
R7 Control Trip
DDB #006
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 2
Appendix A
Page 87 of 87

LED Mappings
IN>1 Trip
DDB #204
IN>2 Trip
DDB #205
IN>3 Trip
DDB #206
IN>4 Trip
DDB #207
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #209
ISEF>2 Trip
DDB #210
Latching
LED 1
DDB #064
Latching
LED 2
DDB #065
Latching
LED 3
DDB #066
Latching
LED 4
DDB #067
Latching
LED 5
DDB #068
Latching
LED 6
DDB #069
Latching
LED 7
DDB #070
NonLatching
LED 8
DDB #071
ISEF>3 Trip
DDB #211
ISEF>4 Trip
DDB #212
IREF> Trip
DDB #208
VN>1 Trip
DDB #213
VN>2 Trip
DDB #214
I>1 Trip
DDB #239
I>2 Trip
DDB #243
I>3 Trip
DDB #247
I>4 Trip
DDB #251
df/dt Trip
DDB #202
V Shift Trip
DDB #203
V<1 Trip
DDB #215
V<2 Trip
DDB #219
V>1 Trip
DDB #223
V>2 Trip
DDB #227
F<1 Trip
DDB #231
F<2 Trip
DDB #232
F<3 Trip
DDB #233
F<4 Trip
DDB #234
F>1 Trip
DDB #235
F>2 Trip
DDB #236
Power1 Trip
DDB #237
Power2 Trip
DDB #238
Any Start
DDB #255
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Appendix B
External Connection Diagrams
da
dn
Notes
(b)
1. (a)
Pin terminal (PCB type)
CT shorting links
S1
S2
P1
Note 2
S1
9-way and 25-way female D-type socket
50 OHM BNC connector
S2
P2
Direction of forward current flow
VN
VC
VB
VA
IN
Sensitive
IC
IB
IA
1A
5A
1A
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
5A
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D7
MiCOM P341 (Part)
1A
5A
1A
5A
3. This relay should be assigned to any trip to ensure correct

operation of the protective relay
2. CT connections are shown 1A connected and are typical only
C24
C23
C22
C21
C20
C19
C15
C14
C13
C9
C8
C6
C7
C5
C3
C4
C2
C1
Phase rotation
Common
connect
Opto 8
Opto 7
Opto 6
Opto 5
Opto 4
Opto 3
Opto 2
Opto 1
CTS
RTS
0V
TX
RX
48V dc field
voltage out
Power supply version 24 48V (nominal) dc only.
F10
F9
F8
F7
F2
F1
SK1
19, 18, 22, 25

14
0V
Not connected
11, 12, 15, 13,

20, 21, 23, 24
29
17
16
10
T0 T7
D0 D7
or DC
Vx AC
Aux. supply
Serial port
Test/
download
Data ready
Data
acknowledge
External
reset
Download
command
E2
E17
E18
E16
E14
E15
E13
E11
E12
E10
E8
E9
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
F16
SCN
SK2
E1
F14
F13
F11
F12
F18
F17
MiCOM P341 (Part)
Fibre optic
communication
(optional)
Case
earth
IRIG-B Input
(Optional)
RX
TX
Relay 7
Relay 6
Relay 5
Relay 4
Any trip
Relay 3 Note 3
Relay 2
Relay 1
Watchdog
contact
Watchdog
contact
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Appendix B
Page 1 of 2
Figure 1. External connection diagram: (40TE) interconnection protection for embedded generation
Sheet 1.
Customer setting
Opto 2
Opto 3
Opto 4
Opto 5
Opto 6
Opto 7
Opto 8
Setting Group
Block IN>3&4
Block I>3&4
Reset
Ext. Prot. Trip
52 a
52 b
Common
connect
Opto 1
Setting Group
Default setting
See Note 3
E2
E17
E18
Note 3. This relay should be assigned to any trip to ensure correct

operation of the protective relay
D18
D17
E16
E14
E15
D16
E13
D14
E11
E12
E10
E8
E9
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
D15
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
F14
E1
D4
F13
F11
F12
D3
D2
D1
MiCOM P341 (Part)
Relay 7
Relay 6
Relay 5
Relay 4
Relay 3
Relay 2
Relay 1
Watchdog
contact
Watchdog
contact
Control Trip
Control Close
CB Fail
General Alarm
Any Trip
I>1 Start
IN>1 Start
Default setting
Customer setting
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Appendix B
Page 2 of 2
Figure 2. External connection diagram: (40TE) interconnection protection for embedded generation
Sheet 2.
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P341
TG8617A
Volume 1
Appendix B
Page 3 of 2
A L S T O M T & D P r o t e c t i o n & C o n t r o l L t d St Leonards Works, Stafford, ST17 4LX England

Tel: 44 (0) 1785 223251 Fax: 44 (0) 1785 212232 Email: pcs.enquiries@tde.alstom.com Internet: www.alstom.com
2000 ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd
Our policy is one of continuous product development and the right is reserved to supply equipment which may vary from that described.
Publication TG8617A
Printed in England.

P341

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P341

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical Guide TG8617A

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

COURIER DATA BASE

EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to product documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Functional *earth terminal.

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Decommissioning and Disposal

It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water

This equipment requires a

IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995

Distribution level, fixed

IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995

Compliance with the

INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Relay front view

MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply

INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM

Application Notes (includes a copy of publication R6617)

Communications and Interface Guide

Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103

Volume 2 Operation Guide

Installation (includes a copy of publication R6617)

Commissioning and Maintenance

Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Introduction to the relay

Front comms port

Relay front view

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Relay rear panel

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Optional IRIG-B board

Digital input connections

Rear comms port

Current* and voltage

Figure 2: Relay rear view

Refer to the wiring diagram in Appendix B for complete connection details.

Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Display & modification of

Digital I/O signal status

Reset of fault & alarm

Clear event & fault

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Up to 4 protection setting groups

Control & support

Figure 3: Menu structure

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Disturbance recorder settings

Control and support settings

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Read access to all settings, alarms, event

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)

Other default displays

Date and time

Other column headings

Figure 4: Front panel user interface